JP7054531B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes an effect based on the determination result.

In the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined whether or not a gaming ball wins a prize at the starting port and a special game is executed, a special mode in which the determination result is shown after the special symbol is variablely displayed on the special symbol display. The symbol is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in a predetermined image display device, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, and the determination result is shown as the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

JP-A-2015-96091

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest of the production.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the production.

The present invention has adopted the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine including a main control means and an effect control means, and the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition. And, based on the determination result of the determination means, the identification information control means for displaying the identification information in a variable manner in any one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the first fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern and then stopping the display. The effect control means can receive the control information transmitted from the control information transmitting means, and executes a game effect in response to the reception. It is possible, and in the game effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed according to the variable display of the identification information, and a plurality of combinations indicating the determination result of the determination means according to the stop display of the identification information. There is a decorative symbol effect for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol, and a light emitting effect executed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display. When the specific control information is received, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the light emitting effect, the specific light emitting effect executed when displaying the decorative symbol of the combination notifying the execution of the special game and the combination not notifying the execution of the special game are described. There is a predetermined light emitting effect executed when displaying the decorative pattern, and the number of times the light emitting effect is executed is the first number in the case of the first variation pattern, and is the first number in the case of the second variation pattern. It is the second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times, and in the specific light emitting effect, the first image can be superimposed and displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbols, and in the predetermined light emitting effect, each of the plurality of decorative symbols can be displayed. On the other hand, when the second image can be superimposed and displayed and the specific control information is received in the specific variation display in which the specific light emitting effect is executed, the decorative symbol is executed after the specific light emitting effect is executed. Is the first time until the stop display is performed, and the specific control information related to the next variation display is received without receiving the specific control information in the specific variation display. The time from the execution of the specific light emitting effect to the stop display of the decorative symbol is the second time, which is longer than the first time .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the fun of the production.

Schematic front view of pachinko gaming machine 1 Schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Enlarged view of display 4 in FIG. A block diagram showing a configuration example of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the game control unit 100. Detailed flowchart of start port switch processing in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of gate switch processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S4 in FIG. A flowchart showing the details of the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. A flowchart showing the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S408 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the stopped processing of step S416 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the normal symbol processing of step S5 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the large winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process of step S620 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of electric tulip processing in FIG. It is a figure which shows the breakdown of the jackpot symbols selected according to the winning of each start opening, and is the figure which shows the content of the jackpot game corresponding to each symbol. A diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern The figure which shows an example of the mode of the decoration pattern in a game state and each production section. The figure which shows an example of the variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state. The figure which shows an example of the variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of a special symbol in a probabilistic game state. Diagram showing the flow of variable production including SPSP reach production The figure which shows the detail of the hit notification performed as a result of SPSP reach production. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 22 is performed. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a hit notification is performed, which is an effect following FIG. 23. The figure which shows the detail of the loss notification performed as a result of the SPSP reach production. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a loss notification is performed, which is an effect following FIG. 23. The figure which shows the flow of the production when the re-lottery production is performed during the hit notification. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a re-lottery effect is performed during a hit notification. Diagram showing the flow of variable production including special production A diagram showing the details of the hit notification performed as a result of the special effect. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including the special effect shown in FIG. 29 is performed. Diagram showing other examples of images displayed on the screen when variable effects including special effects are performed. The figure which shows the flow of the fluctuation effect when it is judged as a big hit in a probabilistic game state. The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen when the variation effect shown in FIG. 33 is performed. The figure which shows an example of the production following FIG. The figure which shows an example of the flow of the variation effect when the 2nd light emission effect is performed after the 1st light emission effect when the hit notification is performed in the probabilistic game state. The figure which shows an example of the effect displayed on the screen when it is judged as a 4R normal jackpot in a probabilistic game state. Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the light emission effect during non-reach in the normal gaming state Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of non-reach medium light emission effect when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped at the same time in a normal game state. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of non-reach medium light emission effect when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in order in a normal game state. Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the light emission effect during non-reach in the probabilistic gaming state Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of light-emitting effect during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped at the same time in a probabilistic gaming state. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of light-emitting effect during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in order in a probabilistic gaming state. A table for explaining the total number of non-reach light emission effects for each fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state. A table for explaining the total number of non-reach light emission effects for each fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic gaming state. A time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first reach symbol light emitting effect in the normal gaming state. A time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the second reach symbol light emitting effect in the normal gaming state. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of reach light emission effect in a normal game state Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of reach symbol light emission effect in a normal game state Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the 2nd reach symbol light emission effect in a normal game state. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the 2nd reach symbol light emission effect in a normal game state. Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the reach light emission effect in the probabilistic gaming state An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the first reach symbol light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state. An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the first reach symbol light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state. A table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect, and the hit light emitting effect in the normal game state. A table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect in the probabilistic game state. A diagram showing an example of the flow of production over the fluctuation of multiple special symbols when the look-ahead chance eye is displayed. The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen when the effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed. The figure which shows an example of the production following FIG. 58 The figure which shows an example of the variation effect when the NEXT symbol suggesting a pseudo-ream is displayed in a normal game state. The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen when the variation effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed. The figure which shows the comparison of the swing period of the decorative symbol 55 when the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect are executed. The figure which shows the comparison of the swing period of the decorative symbol in the case where the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive the command from the game control unit 100. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the effect control unit 130. A flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the pending command process in step 1302 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of fluctuation start command processing in step 1304 of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the image / sound control unit 140. Detailed flowchart of lamp control processing by lamp control unit 150

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Rough configuration example of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 provided with accessories related to winning and determination (lottery), and a frame member 3 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been done.

When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game ball stored in the upper plate 28 is guided to the launching device (not shown), and the hitting force according to the rotation angle of the lever 21 is used. It is fired into the game area 10. A game kugi, a windmill, or the like (not shown) is provided in the game area 10, and the launched game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10, and comes into contact with the game kugi, the windmill, or the like. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. The launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped by the player operating the stop button 22.

The upper plate 28 stores the game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for collecting prize balls is provided. When the player operates the eject button 23 arranged close to the lower plate 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls collected in the lower plate 29 are arranged below the lower plate 29. It falls into a box (not shown).

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" in which the lever 21 is kept rotated at a small angle of rotation, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" that maintains the state in which the lever 21 is rotated at a large angle of rotation, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two ordinary winning openings 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passage path of the left-handed game ball as a winning and judging accessory. Has been done. In addition, in the passage path of the game ball hit to the right, the second start opening 12, the large winning opening 13, the two ordinary winning openings 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip are used as accessories related to winning and judgment. 17 is provided.

The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters any of the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 13, and the normal winning opening 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And win a prize. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the winning place are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that did not win the prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

The first starting port 11 as the first starting area is a starting port that is always open, and the second starting port 12 as the second starting area is operated by the electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins a prize, or when the gaming ball passes through the second starting opening 12 and wins a prize, a jackpot game (special game) that is advantageous to the player. Is determined, and the determination result is displayed on the display 4 described later.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball is won in the first starting port 11 is called "first special symbol determination", and the determination is performed on the condition that the game ball is won in the second starting opening 12. The determination to be executed is referred to as "second special symbol determination", and these determinations (lottery) are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination (special symbol lottery)".

The large winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the large winning opening 13 is provided at the opening of the large winning opening 13. The large winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit" is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the jackpot game in which the plate is operated to open the jackpot 13. Is executed. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the jackpot game as compared with the case where the jackpot game is not performed.

The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured to be able to change its posture between a closed posture in which a pair of blade members close the second starting port 12 (see FIG. 1) and an open posture in which the second starting port 12 is opened (not shown). ing.

The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 12, although the prize ball is not paid out. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened, the operation of the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 to maintain the open posture for a predetermined time and then return to the closed posture is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 12 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, whereas the second starting port 12 is in a state in which the game ball is easily passed by operating the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination (lottery) executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is referred to as "ordinary symbol determination (ordinary symbol lottery)".

The ordinary winning opening 14 is always open like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by winning a game ball. In addition, unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, the determination (lottery) is not performed even if the game ball wins in the normal winning opening 14.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins a prize, among the big hit, the small hit (for example, the small hit may be made with a probability of 1/7), and the loss. Which of the above may be determined. Further, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state may shift from the low-probability gaming state and the non-assisted gaming state to the low-probability gaming state and the auxiliary gaming state (the gaming state will be described later). In such a gaming machine 1, for example, when the jackpot symbol for notifying that it is a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the display 4 (specifically, the second special symbol display 42), the big prize opening 13 is displayed. The jackpot game to be used is executed. On the other hand, when the small hit symbol notifying that it is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the display 4, first, the small hit game using the small winning opening having the V winning opening inside is executed. For example, a plate for opening and closing the small winning opening is provided at the opening of the small winning opening. The small winning opening is usually closed by this plate. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the small hit game in which the plate is operated to open the small winning opening is executed. On condition that the game ball passes through the V winning opening during this small hit game, the big hit game using the large winning opening 13 is started following the small hit game. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the small hit game as compared with the case where the small hit game is not performed. If the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening during the small hit game, the big hit game following the small hit game is not executed, and the game state does not shift to the time-saving game state.

[Structure example of the production means of the pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a movable accessory 7, a speaker 24, a board lamp 25, and a production button 26 as various effects. Has been done. Further, the frame member 3 has a built-in frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) which is not shown in FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that is easily visible by the player. On the liquid crystal display device 5, for example, various display objects such as a decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, a character or item for performing a notice effect, and a hold icon displayed as many as the number of pending special symbol determinations are displayed. An effect image including is displayed. The image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The movable accessory 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2, and is normally retracted to a retracted position between the screen and the game board 2 on the left and right sides of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and operates. Sometimes it is configured to advance to the front of the screen. A light emitting element (for example, an LED) is built in the movable accessory 7, and a part or all of the movable accessory 7 emits light by causing the LED to emit light. The movable accessory 7 performs various effects by operating or emitting light based on the result of the special symbol determination.

The board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light such as changing the lighting or blinking pattern and changing the emission color. The speaker 24 outputs music, voice, sound effects, and the like so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 5, and performs the effect by sound.

In the present embodiment, in order to suggest the high or low possibility of a big hit (hereinafter referred to as "reliability"), an effect image can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 or an effect means (specifically) capable of emitting light. In some cases, the effector 7, the board lamp 25, and the frame lamp 37) are made to emit light. In this embodiment, white, blue, green, red, zebra, and iridescent are used as colors suggesting high or low reliability. The reliability of each color is higher in the above order. In the present embodiment, the color below red is used in the case of a big hit and the case of a loss, and does not function as a color suggesting a big hit (that is, the reliability is 100%). Zebra has a relatively high reliability regardless of which effect is used, and there are two types of effects: one that uses zebra only when it is a big hit, and the other that uses zebra when it is a big hit and when it is lost. be. Specifically, the zebra functions as a color that suggests a jackpot when used, for example, in the production of displaying a cut-in image, and is relatively reliable when used as the color of a hold icon (for example, about). 76%) It functions as a color suggesting that. Iridescent color is used only when the reliability is 100% and it is a big hit (that is, it is not used when it is a loss). In addition, as a color suggesting a big hit, another single color (for example, red) may be used instead of zebra and rainbow color, or another composite color (for example, a composite color of red, yellow, and white) may be used. May be done.

[Structure example of operating means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information by being pressed by the player. The effect button 26 is configured to be able to project upward by a drive mechanism (not shown). At the time of executing the effect using the effect button 26 (specifically, from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid), the upper surface thereof remains in the normal state and more than in the normal state. It may protrude. The presence or absence of protrusion may be determined based on, for example, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the jackpot symbol, the type of the variation pattern, or all or a part of them. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the reliability for the big hit by the mode of the effect button 26. In the present embodiment, one type of operation (that is, pressing) is possible for the effect button 26 regardless of the presence or absence of protrusion.

In another embodiment, the operating means may be configured in advance so that a plurality of types of operations can be performed on one operating means. For example, the types of operations that can be performed on the effect button 26 in the normal state and the types of operations that can be performed on the effect button 26 in the protruding state may be different. Specifically, for example, the effect button 26 can be pressed in the normal state, and when the effect button 26 is controlled in the protruding state, it is controlled so that it cannot be pressed and the upper surface of the effect button 26 is pressed. It may be configured so that the player can perform an operation such as pulling toward himself / herself. For example, in order to suggest the reliability of the jackpot, the player may be prompted to perform any one operation selected from a plurality of types of operations prepared in advance. Which type of operation is prompted may be determined based on, for example, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the jackpot symbol, the type of the variation pattern, or all or a part of them.

The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect may be performed according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27.

In addition to the effect button 26, an operation means that can be operated by the player may be provided. For example, two operating means having different reliability for big hits may be provided. For example, when the reliability is relatively low, the player is prompted to operate the first operating means (for example, the effect button 26), and when the reliability is relatively high, the player operates the second operating means. May be prompted by. The second operating means may be provided, for example, at a position (for example, to the left of the lower plate 29) where it is more difficult for the player to operate than the first operating means. This makes it possible to suggest the reliability by which operation means is prompted by the player. When the second operating means is operated during the operation promoting effect for encouraging the operation of the first operating means, the same effect as when the first operating means is operated may be executed according to the operation. , Another effect different from the case where the first operating means is operated may be executed, or no effect may be executed.

[Configuration example of display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, and the first It includes a special symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, a game status indicator 47, a round indicator 48, and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination, thereby determining the first special symbol. Notify the judgment result. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination, thereby determining the second special symbol. Notify the judgment result. In the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42, as the determination symbol, the jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit" or the determination result of the special symbol determination is "missing". The lost symbol indicating that "" is stopped and displayed.

The first special symbol hold display 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol hold indicator 44 displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of holds for normal symbol determination. The gaming status display 47 displays the gaming status at the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. The round display 48 displays the number of rounds of the big hit game when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is referred to as "first special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as "second special symbol". Are collectively called "special symbols". Further, the symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 45 is referred to as a "ordinary symbol".

[Configuration of control device for pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a game control unit 100 and a game control unit that control execution of determination (lottery), control of a jackpot game, command transmission processing to the effect control unit 130, and the like. The effect control unit 130 that comprehensively controls the effect based on the command received from 100, the image / sound control unit 140 that controls the effect by images and sounds, and the lamp control that controls the effect by various lamps and movable accessories 7. The unit 150 is provided. In addition to the one shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a payout control unit (not shown) that controls the payout of prize balls.

[Structure of game control unit 100]
The game control unit 100 includes a CPU 101, a ROM 102, and a RAM 103. Based on the program stored in the ROM 102, the CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to the number of payout prize balls such as an internal lottery and a determination of winning. The RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 101 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

The game control unit 100 includes a first start port switch (SW) 111, a second start port switch (SW) 112, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 113, a first gate switch (SW) 114, and a second gate switch (SW) 115. , The large winning opening switch (SW) 116, the large winning opening control unit 117, the normal winning opening switch (SW) 118, and the display 4 are connected.

The first start port switch 111 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 12, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 opens / closes the second starting port 12 by operating an electric solenoid connected to a pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be drive-transmitted in response to a control signal from the game control unit 100. do. The first gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 15, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The second gate switch 115 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The large winning opening switch 116 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 13, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The large winning opening control unit 117 opens and closes the large winning opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid connected to a plate that closes the large winning opening 13 so as to be drive-transmitted in response to a control signal from the game control unit 100. do. The normal winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the normal winning opening 14, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100.

The CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 is a place where the game ball wins when a detection signal from the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the large winning opening switch 116, or the normal winning opening switch 118 is input. The payout control unit is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the above, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control unit.

The CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random number. Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random number. Then, when the result of the special symbol determination becomes a big hit, the special game is executed by opening and closing the big winning opening 13 via the big winning opening control unit 117. Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 is input, and executes a normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. Then, when the result of the normal symbol determination is successful, the electric tulip 17 is operated via the electric tulip opening / closing portion 113 to temporarily open the second starting port 12.

Further, the CPU 101 transmits information indicating the change start or change stop of the special symbol to the effect control unit 130. Further, the CPU 101 transmits information regarding the fluctuation setting of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation setting of the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery to the effect control unit 130. Further, the CPU 101 transmits data indicating a setting for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, information for notifying the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 that the game ball has won a prize, and the like to the effect control unit 130. ..

Further, the CPU 101 executes the following processing on the display unit 4. That is, when the first special symbol determination is executed, the CPU 101 causes the first special symbol display 41 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. Further, when the second special symbol determination is executed, the CPU 101 causes the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. Further, when the normal symbol determination is executed, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the determination result.

Further, the CPU 101 causes the first special symbol hold display 43 to display the hold number of the first special symbol determination, and displays the hold number of the second special symbol determination on the second special symbol hold display 44, and makes a normal symbol determination. The number of holdings is displayed on the normal symbol holding display 46. Further, the CPU 101 causes the gaming status display 47 to display the gaming status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 101 causes the round display 48 to display the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

[Structure of effect control unit 130]
The effect control unit 130 includes a CPU 131, a ROM 132, a RAM 133, and an RTC (real-time clock) 134. The CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing for controlling the effect based on the program stored in the ROM 132. The RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the CPU 131 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time.

The effect control unit 130 sets the effect content based on the data indicating the result of the special symbol determination sent from the game control unit 100. The effect control unit 130 transmits a command instructing the execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

The image / sound control unit 140 controls the image display of the liquid crystal display device 5 and controls the sound output of the speaker 24. The image / sound control unit 140 is composed of a CPU 141, a ROM 142, a RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, and the like. Based on the program stored in the ROM 142, the CPU 141 performs arithmetic processing for controlling an image or sound expressing an effect in which the effect content is set by the effect control unit 130. The RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 141 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

The VDP 144 generates an effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The acoustic DSP 145 generates acoustic data output from the speaker 24. The CPU 141 controls the operation of the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145 by generating a control signal based on the command from the effect control unit 130 and the program stored in the ROM 142 and outputting the control signal to the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145.

Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 has a drawing engine that executes drawing processing of the effect image, and an output circuit that outputs the effect image drawn by the drawing engine to the liquid crystal display device 5. The drawing engine draws an effect image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the ROM based on the control signal from the CPU 141. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in the frame buffer to the liquid crystal display device 5 at a predetermined timing.

Although not shown in the figure, the acoustic DSP 145 is used as an acoustic ROM for storing various acoustic data related to production sounds such as music, sound, and sound effects, and as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 145. SSD is connected. The acoustic DSP 145 reads acoustic data corresponding to the control signal from the CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24.

[Structure of lamp control unit 150]
The lamp control unit 150 includes a CPU 151, a ROM 152, and a RAM 153. The CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operations of the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, and the movable accessory 7 based on the program stored in the ROM 152. The RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the CPU 151 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

Light emission pattern data and operation pattern data are stored in the ROM 152. The light emission pattern data is data showing each light emission pattern of the light emission element included in the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 25, and the movable accessory 7. The motion pattern data is data showing the motion pattern of the movable accessory 7.

The CPU 151 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and reads out the light emission pattern data to the RAM 153, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, and the movable combination. The light emission of the light emitting element of the object 7 is controlled. Further, the CPU 151 reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and operates the movable accessory 7 and the effect button 26. Controls the drive of the motor.

[Explanation of game status]
Here, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming state includes a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is the first probability, and a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is a second probability higher than the first probability. There is.

The first probability and the second probability, which are jackpot probabilities, may be fixed values. Further, the first probability and the second probability may be changed depending on the setting.

For example, the jackpot probability may be set to a different probability by a hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the setting value related to the jackpot probability is predetermined according to the operation (for example, pressing) of the setting value switch (not shown) provided on the back surface of the gaming control board 100. (For example, any value from "1" to "6") can be set to the value of. The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to a different probability.

For example, the larger the value of the set value, the more likely it is that a jackpot will occur, and the ratio of the second probability, which is the jackpot probability in the high-probability gaming state, to the first probability, which is the jackpot probability in the low-probability gaming state, does not depend on the set value. It may be fixed. For example, the jackpot probability in the low probability gaming state is set to 1/220 when the set value is "1", and is set to 1/200 when the set value is "2", and the set value is set. When it is "3", it is set to 1/180. Further, the jackpot probability in the high probability gaming state is set to 1/27.5 (= 1/220 × 8 times) when the set value is “1”, and the set value is “2”. Sometimes it is set to 1/25 (= 1/200 x 8 times), and when the set value is "3", it is set to 1 / 22.5 (= 1/180 x 8 times).

A setting key, a setting change switch, and a setting value display device may be provided for setting the jackpot probability. The setting change switch may be provided exclusively for it, or may be used in combination with a RAM clear switch (a switch for initializing the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100). When the setting change switch is used together with the RAM clear switch, for example, when the setting key is turned on (pressed) and the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the jackpot probability is set. When the mode is changed to the change mode, the setting key is turned on, and the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned off, the mode is changed to the jackpot probability setting confirmation mode, the setting key is turned off, and the setting key is turned off. When the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the mode shifts to the RAM clear mode (mode in which the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is initialized and the game machine is started), the setting key is turned off, and the setting key is turned off. And when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned off, the game machine is operated in the power recovery mode (the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is not initialized, and the data at the time of the previous power off is maintained. You may shift to the start-up mode). The gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a capacitor for holding the data stored in the RAM 103 (see FIG. 4) of the gaming control unit 100 when the power is turned off, and the power is supplied for a certain period (for example, 24 hours). It is configured to be able to maintain the data of the RAM 103 even if it is cut off.

Further, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a non-auxiliary gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state. The assisted gaming state has a relatively higher probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination than the non-assisted gaming state (for example, 1 / 1.1). Further, in the auxiliary game state, the opening time of the electric tulip 17 when it is determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination is relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds x 3 times), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relative. It is in a short state (for example, 2 seconds). That is, in the auxiliary gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, a normal symbol determination is performed, and a hit is made with a relatively high probability, and the second starting port 12 is opened for 1.8 seconds x 3 times. The game ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Further, in the auxiliary gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened as compared with the non-auxiliary gaming state.

On the other hand, in the non-auxiliary gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination is relatively low (for example, 1/50) as compared with the auxiliary gaming state, and when it is determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination. The opening time of the electric tulip 17 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). That is, in the non-auxiliary gaming state, even if a normal symbol determination is made when the gaming ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, the probability of winning is relatively low, and the second starting port 12 is 0.1 seconds ×. Since it is opened only once, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 12.

In the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine 1 is set to the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state, and is set to the auxiliary gaming state or the non-auxiliary gaming state.

The low-probability gaming state and the non-assisted gaming state are referred to as a "normal gaming state", and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initially set to the normal gaming state. Further, a high-probability gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state are referred to as a "probability variable gaming state". Further, the low-probability gaming state and the auxiliary gaming state are referred to as "time-saving gaming states".

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the production is performed in any of the three production modes corresponding to the current gaming state, except during the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the normal mode is used, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic mode is used, and when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, the time-saving mode is used. Each production is performed at.

In the normal mode, there are a plurality of production modes (stages, for example, stage A, stage B, etc.). The stage itself does not indicate the possibility of becoming a big hit, and each effect (notice effect, reach effect, hit notification, etc.) described later can be executed in any of the normal modes of stage A and stage B.

[Main processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, the main process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the game control unit 100. The game control unit 100 repeats a series of processes shown in FIG. 5 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interruption during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Run. The processing of the game control unit 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 5 and 5 is performed by the CPU 101 executing the program stored in the ROM 102.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to select a fluctuation pattern having a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more when the result of the special symbol determination is lost. The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol is variablely displayed. The ordinary symbol random number is a random number for determining the winning or losing of the ordinary symbol lottery. The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are generated by, for example, a random number generator every time the process of step S1 is performed.

Following step S1, the CPU 101 executes a start port switch (SW) process (step S2). In the start port switch process, the CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the first start port switch 111 or the second start port switch 112, and each random number (big hit random number, which is appropriately updated by the process of step S1). For the symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number), the value at the time when the detection signal is input is acquired and stored in the RAM 103. This start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S2, the CPU 101 executes a gate switch (SW) process (step S3). In the gate switch processing, the CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115, and if the detection signal is input, acquires the value of the normal symbol random number updated in the processing of step S1. And store it in RAM 103. This gate switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 7.

Following step S3, the CPU 101 executes special symbol processing (step S4). The details will be described later, but in the special symbol processing, whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, the jackpot symbol is determined. Further, the CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination using the random number acquired in the start port switch process in step S2, and causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbol in a variable manner. The special symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed from. The special symbol processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S4, the CPU 101 executes normal symbol processing (step S5). In the normal symbol processing, the CPU 101 executes the normal symbol determination using the normal symbol random number acquired in the gate switch process in step S3, causes the normal symbol display 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then results in the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. The ordinary symbol processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S5, the CPU 101 executes a large winning opening process for opening and closing the large winning opening 13 via the large winning opening control unit 117 when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol determination in the special symbol processing in step S4. (Step S6). The large winning opening processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S6, the CPU 101 executes electric tulip processing (step S7). In the electric tulip processing, the CPU 101 operates a pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing portion 113 when the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol processing in step S5 is won. The electric tulip processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S7, the CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for managing the number of prize balls won and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize (step S8). Specifically, when a game ball wins in any of the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 13, and the normal winning opening 14, the CPU 101 wins a number of prizes according to the winning place. Pay out the ball. For example, the CPU 101 pays out three prize balls when the game ball wins in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, and 15 prize balls when the game ball wins in the large winning opening 13. Pay out.

Following step S8, the CPU 101 executes an output process (step S9). In the output process of step S9, the CPU 101 transmits various commands set in the RAM 103 in the start port switch process of step S2, the special symbol process of step S4, the big prize opening process of step S6, and the like to the effect control unit 130.

[Starting port switch processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the details of the start port switch process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 6 is a detailed flowchart of the start port switch process in step S2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the first start port switch 111 is “ON” (whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11). To judge. When it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is "ON" (step S201: YES), the hold number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reserved symbols Umax1 (for example, 4) is less than (step S202).

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S202: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S203). Then, the CPU 101 acquires the values of various random numbers (big hit random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers) updated by the process of step S1 and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S204).

Here, various random numbers acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 are stored in the RAM 103, so that the first special symbol relating to the reserved ball in which the reserved number U1 is increased in step S203. The right to judge will be withheld. Although the details will be described later, the reserved right of the first special symbol determination is digested in the special symbol processing in step S4, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. The result of the first special symbol determination is notified.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 executes the pre-determination process based on various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 in step S204 (step S205). The pre-judgment process in step S205 is a determination process for the reserved first special symbol determination right, and is a pre-determination process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol in the case of a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern, and the like, and showing the determination result. This is a process for generating determination information. After that, the CPU 101 sets the hold command including the prior determination information in the RAM 103 (step S206). The hold command set in step S206 is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output process in step S9 of FIG. In the pre-determination process of step S205, various random numbers acquired in step S204 may be generated as pre-determination information as they are, and the pre-determination information may be included in the hold command.

When the determination is "NO" in step S201, the determination is "NO" in step S202, or the process of step S206 is executed, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S207. In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the second start port switch 112 is “ON” (whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 12). When it is determined that the second start port switch 112 is "ON" (step S207: YES), the hold number U2 for the second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reserved symbols Umax2 (for example, 4) is less than (step S208).

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (step S208: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S209). Then, the CPU 101 acquires various random numbers (big hit random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers) updated in the process of step S1 and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S210).

Then, the CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process in the same manner as the process of step S205 using various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 by the process of step S210 (step S211), and sends a hold command including the pre-determination information to the RAM 103. Set (step S212).

If it is determined to be "NO" in step S207, if it is determined to be "NO" in step S208, or if the process of step S212 is performed, the CPU 101 ends the start port switch process and performs the gate switch process. Proceed to the process.

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit 100]
FIG. 7 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S3 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the CPU 101 gates based on whether or not a detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 (an ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 or 115 has become “ON”) is input. It is determined whether or not the switch 114 or 115 is "ON" (step S301).

When the CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 or 115 is "ON" (step S301: YES), the hold number G for normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the maximum hold number Gmax for normal symbol determination (for example,). 4) It is determined whether or not it is less than 4) (step S302).

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number G is less than the maximum hold number Gmax (step S302: YES), the CPU 101 updates the hold number G to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S303), and is normally held by this process. An ordinary symbol random number used for symbol determination is acquired and stored in the RAM 103 (step S304). The normal symbol random numbers stored in step S304 may be subjected to pre-determination processing in the same manner as in step S205, and the result of the pre-determination processing may be transmitted to the effect control unit 130 as a hold command for ordinary symbols. ..

[Special symbol processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 11. FIG. 8 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S4 in FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S408 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the special game is in progress (big hit game) based on, for example, the information stored in the RAM 103 (step S401). If it is determined that the special game is in progress (step S401: YES), the CPU 101 ends the special symbol processing.

When the CPU 101 determines that the special game is not in progress (step S401: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is in variable display (step S402). When it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the reserved number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S403). ), When it is determined that the number is "1" or more (step S403: YES), the hold number U2 is subtracted by "1" to digest only 1 hold ball (step S404).

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is not "1" or more (the second special symbol determination is not held) (step S403: NO), the hold number of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is held. When it is determined whether or not U1 is "1" or more (step S405) and it is determined that it is "1" or more (step S405: YES), the number of reserved U1 is subtracted by "1" to reduce the number of reserved balls to 1. Only digest (step S406). On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines in step S405 that the hold number U1 is not "1" or more (step S405: NO), the customer waiting command is set in the RAM 103, and the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 8 is terminated.

The CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process following the process of step S404 or step S406 (step S407). Hereinafter, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 9.

(Big hit judgment process)
As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S431). Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot following the process of step S404 of FIG. 8, the jackpot random number related to the hold ball obtained by subtracting the hold number U2 in the process of step S404 (step S2). It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102. As a result, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit. When the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability gaming state. On the other hand, when determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot following the process of step S406 of FIG. 8, the CPU 101 performs a jackpot random number related to the hold ball obtained by subtracting the hold number U1 in the process of step S406 (RAM 103 in the process of step S2). It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the ROM 102 matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102. As a result, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit.

Here, when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit (step S431: YES), the CPU 101 performs a symbol random number determination process based on the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 together with the above-mentioned jackpot random number. (Step S432). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines which of the random number values assigned to each of the jackpot symbols stored in advance in the ROM 102 matches the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. To determine the jackpot symbol. Then, the CPU 101 sets the determined jackpot symbol in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S433).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S431 that it is not a big hit (step S431: NO), the CPU 101 sets the lost symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is lost in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S434).

After the process of step S433 or the process of step S434, the CPU 101 ends the jackpot determination process and returns the process to the special symbol process of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 8, following the jackpot determination process in step S407, the CPU 101 executes a variation pattern setting process (step S408). Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the probabilistic game flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high-probability game state (step S461). When the probabilistic game flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the auxiliary game state (step S462). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF (step S462: NO), the CPU 101 sets a normal table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S463). When the auxiliary game flag is ON (step S462: YES), the CPU 101 sets the time saving table in the RAM 103 as the variation pattern table (step S464).

On the other hand, when the probability variation game flag is ON (step S461: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation table in the RAM 103 as the variation pattern table (step S466).

The variation pattern table is a table in which conditions for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are defined. Each fluctuation pattern table contains a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, and when there is a loss and no reach (predetermined fluctuation time using a reach random number). Loss fluctuation pattern (without reach) selected when it is not determined to select a fluctuation pattern of (for example, 13 seconds) or more, and when there is a loss and reach (for example, a predetermined fluctuation time using a reach random number) 13 seconds) Includes the reach variation pattern that is selected when it is determined to select a variation pattern of 10 seconds or longer). For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern included in the normal table includes fluctuation patterns such as 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 80 seconds, and 120 seconds, and the reach fluctuation pattern included in the normal table has a fluctuation time of 27 seconds. , 57 seconds, 75 seconds, 113 seconds and the like. Further, as the loss fluctuation pattern included in the normal table, there is a fluctuation pattern such as a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or 12 seconds. Further, the time saving table and the probability variation table have a variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 2 seconds) shorter than the loss variation pattern in the normal table as the loss variation pattern. An example of the variation pattern table of the normal table will be described later with reference to FIG.

Following the processing of step S463, step S464, or step S465, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466). If the result of the jackpot determination is not a loss, that is, if it is a jackpot (step S466: NO), the CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 468.

When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466: YES), the CPU 101 performs a reach random number determination process (step S467). In the reach random number determination process, the CPU 101 determines whether or not to select a reach variation pattern having a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more based on the acquired reach random number. Then, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S468 following the process of step S467.

In step S468, the CPU 101 performs a variation pattern random number determination process. Specifically, the CPU 101 uses the set variation pattern table to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. More specifically, the CPU 101 determines a variation pattern in which the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 and the value set in each variation pattern included in the set variation pattern table match.

In this way, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the variation pattern random number acquired in step S2 and the variation pattern table set in step S463, step S464, or step S465. The determined fluctuation pattern is set in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S469). After the process of step S469, the CPU 101 ends the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10 and proceeds with the processes after step S409 of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 8, following the process of step S408, the CPU 101 shows the symbol setting information set in the process of step S407, the setting information of the variation pattern set in the process of step S408, and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A fluctuation start command including information and the like is generated and set in the RAM 103 (step S409). This variation start command is a command for instructing the execution of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

Following the process of step S409, the CPU 101 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S409 (step S410), and measures the variation time. Start (step S411). When the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed following the processing of step S404, the variation display of the special symbol is performed using the second special symbol display 42, and the processing of step S406 is followed. If it is done, it is done using the first special symbol display 41.

When the CPU 101 determines "YES" in the process of step S402, or when the process of step S411 is executed, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of step S408 from the start of measurement of the variation time in step S411. It is determined whether or not the time has passed (step S412).

When the CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S412: YES), the CPU 101 sets a fluctuation stop command in the RAM 103 to notify that the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped (step S413), and in the process of step S410. The variation display of the started special symbol is terminated (step S414), and the measured variation time is reset (step S415). As a result, on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol determination is performed. The result will be announced. The fluctuation stop command set in the process of step S413 is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

After the process of step S415, the CPU 101 executes the stopped process (step S416). The details of the stopped processing will be described later.

If "YES" is determined in step S401, "NO" is determined in step S405, "NO" is determined in step S412, or the process of step S416 is performed, the CPU 101 determines. The special symbol processing is completed, and the normal symbol processing in step S5 of FIG. 5 is executed.

[Processing during stop by the game control unit 100]
Next, the stopped processing in step S416 of FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 11 is a detailed flowchart showing the stopped processing of step S416 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 (step S480). Then, when the CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S480: YES), the CPU 101 sets the jackpot game flag stored in the RAM 103 to "ON" (step S481).

Following the process of step S481, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag and the probabilistic game flag stored in the RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S482). Following the process of step S482, the CPU 101 starts the opening (step S483) and sets the opening command in the RAM 103 (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the effect control unit 130 to perform an opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is started, and the command is an effect control by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG. It is transmitted to the unit 130.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S480: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485). When it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485: YES), the auxiliary game residual number J stored in the RAM 103 is subtracted by "1" and the J is updated (step S486). .. The auxiliary game residual number J indicates the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols (the number of executions of the special symbol determination) for which the auxiliary game state is maintained, and is set in the game state setting process executed after the jackpot game is performed. .. The details of the game state setting process will be described later.

Following the process of step S486, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game residual number J is "0" (step S487). When it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is "0" (step S487: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to "OFF" (step S488).

When the process of step S488 is executed, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not "ON" (step S485: NO), or when it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is not "0" (step S487: NO). ), The CPU 101 determines whether or not the probabilistic game flag is set to "ON" (step S489).

When it is determined that the probabilistic game flag is set to "ON" (step S489: YES), the CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the high-probability game residual number X stored in the RAM 103, and updates the X. (Step S490). The high-probability game residual number X indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is performed in the high-probability game state, and is set in the game state setting process (described later) executed after the jackpot game is performed.

Following the process of step S490, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game residual number X is “0” (step S491). When it is determined that the high-probability game residual number X is "0" (step S491: YES), the probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "OFF" (step S492).

When the process of step S492 is executed, when the process of step S484 is executed, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not "ON" (step S489: NO), or when the high probability game residual number X is " If it is determined that it is not "0" (step S491: NO), the CPU 101 ends the stopped processing of FIG.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the details of the normal symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart showing the normal symbol processing in step S5 of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S501). The auxiliary flag is a flag set to "ON" when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, and is a flag indicating whether or not the electric tulip 17 is in the game of hitting to operate. The electric tulip 17 operates in a predetermined pattern when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 differs depending on whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary gaming state (whether or not the auxiliary gaming flag is ON). When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S501: YES), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG.

When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S501: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 is being performed (step S502). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the reserved number G of the normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S503). When it is determined that the hold number G is not "1" or more (step S503: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG. 12.

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number G is "1" or more (step S503: YES), the CPU 101 updates the hold number G to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S504), and executes the normal symbol random number determination process. (Step S505). Specifically, the normal symbol random number acquired in the process of step S3 according to the fact that the game ball has passed through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is the winning value of the normal symbol random number stored in the ROM 102. Based on whether or not it matches with, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S506). In addition, in the case of the auxiliary game state, a larger number of winning values of the normal symbol random numbers are set than in the case of the non-auxiliary game state, and in the case of the auxiliary game state, the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit. The probability of becoming is higher than in the non-assisted gaming state.

When the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is not a hit (step S506: NO), the CPU 101 sets the lost symbol in the RAM 103 (step S507).

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S506: YES), the CPU 101 sets the winning symbol in the RAM 103 (step S508).

Following the process of step S507 or the process of step S508, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game state is in the auxiliary game state based on whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON (step S509).

When the CPU 101 determines that the game is not in the auxiliary gaming state (step S509: NO), the CPU 101 sets the normal symbol fluctuation time, which is the time for variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45, to, for example, 25 seconds (step S510). On the contrary, when it is determined that it is in the auxiliary gaming state (step S509: YES), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a relatively short value, for example, 2 seconds (step S511). The normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S510 or step S511 is temporarily stored in the RAM 103.

Following the process of step S510 or step S511, the CPU 101 starts the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 (step S512), and starts the measurement of the elapsed time from the start of the variation display (step S513). ..

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol display 45 is in the process of displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (step S502: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not to end the variable display of the normal symbol (step S516). Specifically, the variation display of the normal symbol is based on whether or not the elapsed time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S513 reaches the normal symbol variation time set in the process of step S512 or step S513. Determine if the end timing has come. When it is determined that the end timing has not been reached (step S516: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG. 12.

When the CPU 101 determines that it is the end timing of the variation display of the normal symbol (step S516: YES), the CPU 101 ends the variation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 45 (step S517). Specifically, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 45 to stop and display the symbol set in the process of step S507 or step S508. As a result, the result of the normal symbol determination is notified.

Following the process of step S517, the CPU 101 resets the elapsed time at which the measurement was started by the process of step S515 (step S518). Then, similarly to the above step S506, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S519), and if it is determined to be a hit (step S519: YES), the auxiliary flag is set to "ON". Set (step S520). This auxiliary flag is set to "ON", and the electric tulip processing described later is performed to operate the electric tulip 17.

When the process of step S520 is performed, when the process of step S516 determines NO, or when the process of step S519 determines NO, the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol process of FIG. 12.

In the non-auxiliary gaming state, the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 5.6 seconds) and the second starting port 12 is opened for a short time (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). There may be a hit.

[Large winning opening processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the details of the large winning opening processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing the large winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the special game flag (big hit game flag) is ON (step S601). When the special game flag is ON (step S601: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening is in progress (step S602). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game started in step S483 is being opened.

If it is during the opening (step S602: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). The opening time varies depending on the jackpot symbol. If the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the CPU 101 sets R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) to "0" according to the result of the jackpot determination process, and sets the value of Rmax. The opening pattern (opening time, number of times of opening, interval time, etc.) of the large winning opening 13 is set (step S604).

Here, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot symbol. Although the details will be described later, the number of rounds differs depending on the jackpot symbol, and the CPU 101 sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol.

Following step S604, the CPU 101 adds "1" to R and stores it in the RAM 103 (step S605). Next, the CPU 101 starts opening control of the large winning opening 13 based on the opening pattern set in step S604 (step S606), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the RAM 103 (step S607). After the process of step S607, the CPU 101 then executes the process of step S611.

On the other hand, if it is not during the opening (step S602: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending is in progress (step S608). If the ending is in progress (step S608: YES), the CPU 101 then executes the process of step S617. If it is not during the ending (step S608: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the interval between the round games (step S609). If the interval is in progress (step S609: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed (step S610), and if so (step S610: YES), then performs the process of step S605. Run. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S610: NO), the CPU 101 ends the large winning opening process.

On the other hand, when it is not in the interval (step S609: NO), that is, when the round game is in progress, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the round end condition is satisfied (step S611). If the round end condition is not satisfied (step S611: NO), the CPU 101 ends the large winning opening process.

For example, the round end condition of the long open round game, which will be described later, is that, for example, 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening control of the large winning opening of this round was started in step S606, or the large of this round in step S606. The number of winnings to the large winning opening of the game ball after the opening control of the winning opening is started has reached a predetermined value. When any one of these two conditions is satisfied, the CPU 101 determines that the round end condition is satisfied.

When the round end condition is satisfied (step S611: YES), the CPU 101 ends the opening control of the large winning opening in this round (step S612). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets a round end command (step S613). This round end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 determines whether or not R is equal to Rmax (step S614). That is, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S604.

If it is determined that R is not equal to Rmax (step S614: NO), the CPU 101 starts measuring the interval time (step S615), and then ends the large winning opening process.

When it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S614: YES), the CPU 101 starts the ending (step S616) and sets the ending command in the RAM 103 (step S617).

When the processing of step S617 is performed or the determination is YES in the processing of step S608, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since the ending was started in step S616 (step). S618). If the ending time has elapsed (step S618: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the special game this time is a jackpot game (step S619). When the jackpot game flag is ON, the CPU 101 executes the game state setting process (step S620). The details of the game state setting process will be described later. When the game state setting process of step S620 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S619, the CPU 101 sets the special game flag (big hit game flag) to OFF (step S621).

When NO is determined in the process of step S601, NO is determined in the process of step S611, NO is determined in the process of step S618, NO is determined in the process of step S610, NO is determined in the process of step S603. When the determination is made, the process of step S615 is executed, or the process of step S621 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the large winning opening process shown in FIG.

[Game state setting process by the game control unit 100]
Next, the game state setting process in step S620 of FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 14 is a detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process of step S620 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot this time is a probabilistic jackpot accompanied by a transition to a high-probability gaming state (step S630). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot based on the symbol set in the jackpot determination process. In the case of a probability variation jackpot (step S630: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation game flag and the auxiliary game flag to ON (step S631), sets Xmax for the high probability game residual number X, and sets the auxiliary game residual number. Jmax is set in J (step S632). Xmax and Jmax are predetermined values, and very large values such as 10000 are set as Xmax and Jmax. Since a very large value Xmax is set for X, the game is effectively controlled in a high-probability gaming state until the next big hit.

When the process of step S632 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in step S630, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a normal jackpot accompanied by a transition to a time-saving gaming state (step S633). If YES is determined in step S633, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to ON (step S634). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets, for example, "100" in the auxiliary game residual number J (step S635).

When the process of step S635 is performed, or when NO is determined in step S633, the CPU 101 ends the game state setting process shown in FIG.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the details of the electric tulip processing in step S7 of FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip processing of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701). When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S701: NO), the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip processing.

When the CPU 101 determines that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702). When it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not in operation (step S702: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON, thereby determining whether or not it is in the auxiliary game state (step S703).

When the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary gaming state (step S703: NO), for example, the CPU 101 sets the RAM 103 with an operation pattern in which the operation of opening the second starting port 12 for 0.1 second is performed once (step S704).

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is in the auxiliary gaming state (step S703: YES), the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 is, for example, an operation pattern of opening the second starting port 12 for 1.8 seconds three times. It is set in the RAM 103 (step S705).

After setting the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 by the process of step S704 or step S705, the CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 to start the operation of the electric tulip 17 in the set operation pattern (step S706).

When the CPU 101 executes the process of step S706, or determines that the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702: YES), whether or not the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S706 is completed. (Step S707). When it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 17 is completed (step S707: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S708).

When NO is determined in the process of step S701, NO is determined in the process of step S707, or the process of step S708 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip process.

[Type of jackpot]
Next, the jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) selected when the result of the special game determination is a jackpot will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a breakdown of jackpot symbols selected according to winning a prize at each starting port, and is a diagram showing the contents of a jackpot game corresponding to each symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and becomes a big hit, any one of the big hit symbol Z1 to the big hit symbol Z3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Then, a jackpot game (a kind of special game) is performed according to each jackpot symbol. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 12, any one of the jackpot symbol Z4 to the jackpot symbol Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and each jackpot symbol is displayed. A jackpot game (a type of special game) is performed according to the above.

Specifically, when it is determined to be a jackpot based on the winning of the first starting port 11, the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected at a rate of 15% and the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected at a rate of 50%. , The jackpot symbol Z3 is selected at a rate of 35%.

When the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected, as a jackpot game, a predetermined round end condition (for example, until the number of winning balls to the jackpot 13 reaches 10 or after the jackpot 13 is opened). Until 29.5 seconds have elapsed), a long-open round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened is performed 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as "R")). For example, in a 10R jackpot game, about 1500 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed as a jackpot game. After the jackpot symbol Z1 or the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected and the jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state and auxiliary gaming state), and substantially until the next jackpot. The state continues.

The jackpot by the jackpot symbol Z1 is called "10R probability variation jackpot", and the jackpot by the jackpot symbol Z2 is called "4R probability variation jackpot".

Further, when the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed. After the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected and the jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a low-probability gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state (time-saving gaming state). The time-saving gaming state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times, and when the 100th special symbol change is completed, the gaming machine 1 is returned to the normal gaming state. The jackpot by the jackpot symbol Z3 may be referred to as "4R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit based on the winning of the second starting port 12, the jackpot symbol Z4 is selected at a rate of 40%, the jackpot symbol Z5 is selected at a rate of 25%, and the jackpot symbol Z5 is selected at a rate of 35%. Symbol Z6 is selected.

When the jackpot symbol Z4 or Z5 is selected, the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game. The probabilistic game state substantially continues until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol Z6 is selected, it shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game, and the time-saving gaming state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times.

The jackpot symbol Z4 is a symbol indicating the above-mentioned 10R probability variation jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a 10R long open round game is performed. The jackpot symbol Z5 is a symbol indicating the above-mentioned 4R probability variation jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a 4R long open round game is performed. Further, the jackpot symbol Z6 is a symbol indicating a 4R normal jackpot.

(Explanation of variable production and reach production)
Here, the variable effect and the reach effect will be described. The "variable effect" is an effect performed during the change of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and is started according to the start of the change of the special symbol and ended according to the end of the change of the special symbol. It is a production. The variable effect is an effect using a decorative pattern displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “liquid crystal screen 5”), an effect using other images, and a sound output from the speaker 24. The effect using the effect, the effect using the movable accessory 7, the effect using the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, and the effect using the effect button 26 are included.

The "reach effect" is an effect using a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and is an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. Specifically, as will be described later, the liquid crystal screen 5 displays a decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol and stops at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol. The decorative symbol is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed. Depending on the stop mode of the decorative symbol, it is notified whether the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit or a loss. Specifically, the liquid crystal screen 5 displays three decorative patterns, left, middle, and right.

When three decorative symbols start to fluctuate in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol and all three decorative symbols of the same type stop (for example, "777" or "444"), the jackpot is notified. .. The state in which three similar decorative patterns are aligned is called "doublet" or "matching patterns". On the other hand, if the three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned and stopped, it means that the loss is basically notified. The reach production is a production that makes the player expect that three similar decorative patterns are aligned.

For example, the reach effect is an effect in which decorative symbols of the same type are temporarily stopped on the left and right, and the decorative symbols are fluctuated in the middle area. It is a production that makes people expect.

In the present embodiment, there are three types of reach effects: normal reach effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “N reach”), SP reach effect, and SPSP reach effect. The N-reach production is the production with the lowest possibility of becoming a big hit (also called expectation or reliability) among multiple reach productions. For example, the expectation of N reach production is 0.1% or less. As the N reach effect, there may be a plurality of N reach effects having different (or the same) effects time and / or expectations.

The SP reach production is a production with a higher degree of expectation than the N reach production, and is a reach production having a longer production time than the N reach production. For example, the expectation of SP reach production is 5 to 10%. As the SP reach effect, there may be a plurality of SP reach effects. The degree of expectation of the jackpot differs depending on each SP reach effect, and the effect time may also differ. The longer the SP reach effect is, the higher the expectation may be.

The SPSP reach production is a production with a higher degree of expectation than the SP reach production, and is a reach production having a longer production time than the SP reach production. For example, the expectation of SPSP reach production is 30 to 50%. As the SPSP reach effect, there may be a plurality of SPSP reach effects. The degree of expectation of the jackpot differs depending on each SPSP reach effect, and the effect time may also differ. It may be configured so that the longer the effect time of the SPSP reach effect is, the higher the degree of expectation is.

(Aspect of decorative pattern)
Here, the mode of the decorative pattern may change depending on the effect section in the variable effect. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a game state and an aspect of a decorative symbol in each effect section.

The decorative symbol 55 includes, for example, an effect symbol represented by a number from “1” to “9”. In FIG. 17, as an example of the decorative symbol 55, an odd symbol “1” symbol and an even symbol “4” symbol are shown. As shown in FIG. 17, the decorative pattern 55 includes a character image including a number image 552 and a character image 551 corresponding to the number, and a character-less mode including the number image 552 and not including the character image 551. There is. The number indicated by the decorative symbol 55 and the character image included in the decorative symbol 55 have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the "1" symbol corresponds to the first character, and the "4" symbol corresponds to the fourth character.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal gaming state, before the reach (the section from the start of the change of the special symbol to the establishment of the reach), the size is "medium" (normal), and the decoration is in the form of a character. The symbol 55 is displayed. Further, even during the N reach effect after the reach is established, the decorative symbol 55 having a size of "medium" and having a character is displayed. If the change of the special symbol ends without the reach being established, the form of the decorative symbol 55 is "medium" in size and has a character from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change. Is.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the SP reach effect may be performed after the N reach effect is performed. During this SP reach effect, the mode of the left and right decorative symbols 55 is changed to a mode of "small" size and no character. It should be noted that the SP reach effect may be performed without performing the N reach effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol 55. Also in this case, the mode of the left and right decorative symbols 55 during the SP reach effect is a mode of "small" size and no character.

In addition, the SPSP reach effect may be performed after the SP reach effect is performed. The mode of the left and right decorative symbols 55 during the SPSP reach effect is a mode of "small" size and no character. In some cases, the SPSP reach effect may be performed without the SP reach effect after the N reach effect is performed. Further, the SPSP reach effect may be performed without performing the N reach effect and the SP reach effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol 55. Also in this case, the mode of the left and right decorative symbols 55 during the SPSP reach effect is a mode of "small" size and no character.

Then, after the SPSP reach effect, a winning notification (hit notification or loss notification) is performed. During the hit notification, the aspect of the decorative symbol 55 changes. The details will be described later, but during the predetermined period during the hit notification (for example, during the first light emission effect described later), the decorative symbol 55 has a size of "large" and is displayed in a character-free manner. Further, the decorative symbol 55 has a size of "medium" and is displayed in a character-less mode (or a character-bearing mode) except for a predetermined period during the hit notification. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a "medium" size and with a character. During the loss notification, the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a "medium" size and with a character.

In addition, a winning notification (hit notification or loss notification) may be performed from the SP reach effect. Even when the hit notification is performed from the SP reach effect, the mode of the decorative symbol 55 may change during the hit notification, as in the case where the hit notification is performed from the SPSP reach effect.

On the other hand, in the probabilistic gaming state, before the reach, the decorative symbol 55 has a size of "medium" and is displayed in a character-free manner. Details will be described later, but in the case of a probabilistic game state, a battle effect is executed when the reach is established. The battle production is a production that makes the player expect whether or not the probabilistic gaming state will continue in the probabilistic gaming state, or whether or not the probabilistic gaming state will be achieved in the time-saving gaming state, and the ally character and the enemy character will fight. It is a production. If a victorious effect is performed in which a teammate character wins in a battle effect in a probabilistic game state or a short-time game state, a jackpot game is performed, and the probabilistic game state is entered after the jackpot game. On the other hand, if a defeat effect is performed in which a teammate character is defeated in a battle effect in a probabilistic game state (or a time-saving game state), a jackpot game is performed, and after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state (or the time-saving game state continues). do). As a result of the battle effect, a draw effect may be performed in which the ally character and the enemy character are drawn. The draw effect is an effect indicating that the result of the special game determination is a loss, and is an effect indicating that the current game state continues.

During the battle production, the decorative symbol 55 is "small" in size and is displayed in a character-free manner. During the victory effect after the battle effect is performed, the aspect of the decorative symbol 55 may change. Specifically, during a predetermined period in the victory effect after the battle effect (for example, during the first light emission effect described later), the decorative symbol 55 has a size of "large" and is displayed in a character-free manner. Further, the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a size "medium" and without a character except for a predetermined period in the victory effect. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a size "medium" and without a character. During the defeat effect and the draw effect after the battle effect, the decorative symbol 55 has a size of "medium" and is displayed in a character-free manner.

(Example of fluctuation pattern)
Next, an example of a fluctuation pattern table for selecting a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol will be described. First, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal gaming state. FIG. 19A is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and is a normal jackpot variation pattern table used for selecting a jackpot variation pattern. FIG. 19B is a normal reach variation pattern table used for selecting a reach variation pattern, and when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the variation time of a predetermined time or more is set using the reach random number. It is used when it is determined to select. FIG. 19C is a normal loss fluctuation pattern table used for selecting a loss fluctuation pattern, and when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the reach random number is used to set the fluctuation time for a predetermined time or longer. It is used when it is determined not to select.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table includes jackpot fluctuation patterns OP1 (variation time 30 seconds), OP2 (variation time 60 seconds), OP3 (variation time 80 seconds), and OP4 ( Fluctuation time 120 seconds) and is included. When the variation pattern is selected based on the jackpot variation pattern table, the jackpot variation pattern OP1 is selected at a rate of 0.5%, the jackpot variation pattern OP2 is selected at a rate of 4.5%, and the jackpot variation pattern OP3 is selected. It is selected at a rate of 20% and the jackpot variation pattern OP4 is selected at a rate of 75%.

When the jackpot variation pattern OP1 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including a normal reach effect as a reach effect. Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and then the same type of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped on the left and right to perform N reach effect. ..

Before (or after) the N reach effect is started, the pseudo-variation effect (pseudo-ream) may be performed according to the variation pattern. In this case, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance as variation patterns in which the variation effect including the N reach effect and the pseudo variation effect is performed. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect in which at least one of the three decorative symbols 55 is temporarily stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5 and revariates. The temporary stop is a state in which the decorative symbol 55 does not stop completely but slightly fluctuates (for example, swings up and down). When the decorative pattern 55 does not change again, it may be referred to as "pseudo-no". Further, when the decorative symbol 55 re-variates one or more times, the first re-variation may be referred to as "pseudo 2" and the second re-variation may be referred to as "pseudo 3". The greater the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the reliability of becoming a big hit later. For example, one or a plurality of pseudo-variation effects (re-variations) may be performed before the reach is established (the decorative symbols 55 of the same type are temporarily stopped on the left and right), and then the N reach effect may be started. Further, the reach may be established without the pseudo-variation effect being performed, then one or a plurality of pseudo-variation effects may be performed, the reach may be established again, and the N reach effect may be started. In addition, one or more pseudo-variation effects are performed before the reach is established, then the reach is established, and then one or multiple pseudo-variation effects are performed, the reach is established again, and the reach effect is achieved. It may be done. It should be noted that the pseudo-ream may be performed without temporarily stopping any of the three decorative symbols 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5. In this case, an image suggesting a pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the fluctuation of the three decorative symbols 55, and the pseudo-ream is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the jackpot variation pattern OP2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including the SP reach effect as the reach effect. Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP2 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. It should be noted that a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation effect including the SP reach effect is performed may be prepared, and one or a plurality of pseudo variation effects may be performed in the variation effect including the SP reach effect.

Further, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including a special effect. Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP3 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed, and further. After that, a special production is performed. The special effect is an effect that makes the player expect that the special symbol indicating the big hit stops on the liquid crystal screen 5. The details of the special production will be described later. It should be noted that a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation effect including the special effect is performed may be prepared, and one or a plurality of pseudo variation effects may be performed in the variation effect including the special effect.

Further, when the jackpot variation pattern OP4 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including the SPSP reach effect as the reach effect. Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP4 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed, and further. After that, SPSP reach production is performed. It should be noted that a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation effect including the SPSP reach effect is performed may be prepared, and one or a plurality of pseudo variation effects may be performed in the variation effect including the SPSP reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the reach fluctuation pattern table includes reach fluctuation patterns RP1 (variation time 27 seconds), RP2 (variation time 57 seconds), and RP3 (variation time 75 seconds). RP4 (variation time 113 seconds) is included. When the variation pattern is selected based on the reach variation pattern table, the reach variation pattern RP1 is selected at a rate of 50%, the reach variation pattern RP2 is selected at a rate of 25%, and the reach variation pattern RP3 is selected at a rate of 15%. The reach variation pattern RP4 is selected at a rate of 10%.

When the reach variation pattern RP1 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including an N reach effect as the reach effect. When the reach variation pattern RP2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including the SP reach effect as the reach effect. When the reach variation pattern RP3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including a special effect. When the reach variation pattern RP4 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including the SPSP reach effect as the reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19C, when the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the loss fluctuation pattern table and the value of the reserved number U1 is “2” or less, the loss fluctuation pattern HP1 (variation time 8). Seconds) is selected with an 80% probability, and the loss variation pattern HP2 (variation time 12 seconds) is selected with a 20% probability. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the loss fluctuation pattern table, when the value of the holding number U1 is "3", the loss fluctuation pattern HP3 (variation time 3 seconds) is selected at a rate of 100%.

As described above, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, the SPSP reach effect is easy to be performed, and the N reach effect is difficult to be performed. Further, when it is determined that there is a loss, it is difficult to perform the SPSP reach effect, and it is easy to perform the N reach effect. Therefore, when the SPSP reach effect is performed, the possibility of a big hit after that is relatively high, and when the N reach effect is performed, the possibility of a big hit after that is relatively low, and the big hit. As for the reliability of the above, the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect increase in this order.

Further, as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, there may be a fluctuation pattern that does not include the reach effect. When such a variation pattern is selected, the hit effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned and the jackpot is notified without performing the reach effect. In addition, in the variable effect in which the abutment effect is performed, the reach is established and the N reach effect is performed, and the screen is suddenly switched to align the three decorative symbols 55 or to operate the movable accessory 7. The jackpot may be notified by the production.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a probabilistic gaming state. FIG. 20A is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and is a probability variation jackpot variation pattern table used for selecting a jackpot variation pattern. FIG. 20B is a probabilistic reach variation pattern table used when it is determined that a variation time of a predetermined time or longer is selected by using a reach random number when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. FIG. 20C is a table used when it is determined that the variation time of a predetermined time or longer is not selected by using the reach random number when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 20 (a), when the jackpot symbol is determined in the first special symbol determination and the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected in the probabilistic game state, the variation pattern OP5-1 (variation time 65 seconds). Is selected. When the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-2 (variation time 60 seconds) is selected. Further, when the jackpot symbol is determined in the first special symbol determination and the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected in the probabilistic game state, the variation pattern OP6 (variation time 53 seconds) is selected. Further, when the jackpot symbol is determined in the second special symbol determination and the jackpot symbol Z4 is selected in the probabilistic game state, the variation pattern OP5-1 (variation time 65 seconds) is selected. When the jackpot symbol Z5 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-2 (variation time 60 seconds) is selected. Further, when the jackpot symbol is determined in the second special symbol determination and the jackpot symbol Z6 is selected in the probabilistic game state, the variation pattern OP6 (variation time 53 seconds) is selected.

When the variation pattern OP5-1 or OP5-2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a victory effect. In addition, when the variation pattern OP5-1 is selected, it is notified that the 10R probability variation jackpot is more advantageous for the player in the victory effect, and from the victory effect executed when the variation pattern OP5-2 is selected. A flashy production is performed. Further, when the variation pattern OP6 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a defeat effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the reach variation pattern table used in the probabilistic gaming state includes the reach variation pattern RP5 (variation time 50 seconds). When the reach variation pattern RP5 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a draw effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20 (c), the loss variation pattern table used in the probabilistic gaming state includes the loss variation pattern HP4-1 (variation time 15) selected based on the winning of the first starting port 11. Seconds) and the loss fluctuation patterns HP4-2 (variation time 2 seconds) and HP4-3 (variation time 15 seconds) selected based on the winning of the second starting port 12. The loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected when the hold number U2 is 1 or more, and the loss variation pattern HP4-3 is selected when the hold number U2 is “0”.

In the time-saving gaming state, the same variation pattern table as the probabilistic gaming state may be used as the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, or a variation pattern table different from the probabilistic gaming state is used. May be done.

(Direction during hit notification)
Next, the effect during the hit notification in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, in the present embodiment, a light emitting effect is performed on the decorative pattern on the liquid crystal screen 5. The light emitting effect in the present embodiment is an effect of displaying an effect image (an image showing light emission, lightning, sparks, etc.) in which the decorative pattern appears to shine on the liquid crystal screen 5. The effect image representing the light may be an effect display in which light is emitted or an effect display in which light is sucked, as long as it is an image used to enhance the visual effect. The light emitting effect performed during the hit notification is called a hit light emitting effect. Hereinafter, the hit light emission effect will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24, the hit notification performed after the SPSP reach effect in the normal gaming state will be described.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flow of a variable effect including an SPSP reach effect. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing details of the hit notification performed as a result of the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 22 is performed. FIG. 24 is an effect following FIG. 23, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a hit notification is performed. As described above, the variation effect including the SPSP reach effect is executed when the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is selected.

FIG. 23A shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends. In FIG. 23A, three decorative symbols 55 are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Further, in FIG. 23A, a normal background image is displayed. As shown in the figure, each of the three decorative symbols 55 is a decorative symbol 55 having a size of "medium" and having a character. Further, in the lower region of the liquid crystal screen 5, a plurality of hold icons 51 indicating the hold of the right of the first special symbol determination are displayed. Up to four hold icons 51 are displayed. The hold icon 51 is basically displayed in white, and when the reliability is relatively high, it is a color other than white that suggests high or low reliability (for example, blue, green, red, zebra, and rainbow color). It is displayed (it may be displayed from the beginning or it may change in the middle). The color of the hold icon 51 is determined by the effect control unit 130 by a random number lottery based on the result of the preliminary determination.

Further, in the lower center area of the screen, a changing icon 53 indicating the change of the current first special symbol is displayed. In the present embodiment, the earliest hold icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53. Therefore, the color of the changing icon 53 is basically the same as that of the hold icon 51. The changing icon 53 may change to a color (for example, blue, green, red, zebra, and rainbow color) suggesting high or low reliability of the hold icon 51 or higher. The color of the changing icon 53 is determined by the effect control unit 130 by a random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination.

Further, a small symbol 56 is displayed at the lower left of the screen. The small symbol 56 includes three numerical symbols, changes according to the change of the special symbol, and stops according to the stop of the special symbol. The small symbol 56 has a predetermined high reliability or when the decorative symbol 55 is hidden during the change of the special symbol (for example, while the cut-in image is displayed on the entire screen, when the SPSP reach is developed, or when the small symbol 56 develops into SPSP reach. It is also displayed (for example, while the screen is switched when the production starts). In the present embodiment, a color suggesting high or low reliability is not added to the small symbol 56.

Further, a fourth symbol 57 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed at the right end of the screen. The fourth symbol 57 is a symbol for effect that fluctuates and stops according to the fluctuation and stop of the first special symbol, and is always displayed in a variable manner on the screen during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol 59 corresponding to the second special symbol is also displayed. The fourth symbol 59 is a symbol for effect that fluctuates and stops according to the fluctuation and stop of the second special symbol, and is always displayed in a variable manner on the screen during the fluctuation of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the fourth symbols 57 and 59 notify the result of the special symbol determination by the stopped color. In addition, the fluctuation of the fourth symbol 57, 59 is, for example, an image of a color (for example, red, blue, yellow) for notifying the result of special symbol determination in a repeating order for a fixed time (for example, 0.2 seconds). It is realized by displaying them one by one. In this embodiment, the reliability is not suggested by the changing colors of the fourth symbols 57 and 59. In addition, no color suggesting high or low reliability is added to the fourth symbols 57 and 59. The fourth symbol 57, 59 may be displayed by using another display means (for example, LED) provided around the liquid crystal screen 5, for example.

Further, at the lower right of the screen, a hold number 52 indicating the number of holds for the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is displayed. The holding number 52 includes a number on the left side indicating the number of holdings for the first special symbol determination and a number on the right side indicating the number of holdings for the second special symbol determination. The reserved digit 52 is always displayed on the screen while the special symbol is changing. In the present embodiment, the reserved number 52 does not suggest high or low reliability, and the reserved number 52 is not added with a color suggesting high or low reliability.

The hold icon 51, the changing icon 53, the small symbol 56, the hold number 52, and the fourth symbol 57, 59 are displayed in different places from each other. Since these images are always displayed in front of the other images, they are not obscured by the other images. Specifically, for example, even when an effect image related to a hit light emission effect (effect images 61, 62 described later) is displayed, at least the small symbol 56, the reserved number 52, and the fourth symbol 57, 59 have the effect. The small symbol 56, the reserved number 52, and the fourth symbol 57, 59 are not invisible or their visibility is not deteriorated without the image being applied. The same applies when the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are displayed during the hit light emission effect. Further, even when the effect images related to the reach light emission effect, the non-reach light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect, which will be described later, are displayed, the hold icon 51, the changing icon 53, the small symbol 56, the hold number 52, and the fourth symbol are displayed. The effect image is not applied to 57, 59, and the small symbol 56, the reserved digit 52, and the fourth symbol 57, 59 are not invisible or their visibility is not deteriorated.

In the present embodiment, the sizes of the decorative symbol 55, the changing icon 53, the hold icon 51, the small symbol 56, the hold number 52, and the fourth symbols 57, 59 are smaller in this order. The changing icon 53 and the hold icon 51 may have the same size. Further, the small symbol 56 may be larger than the hold icon 51 (or the changing icon 53), or may be the same size as the hold icon 51 (or the changing icon 53). Further, the reserved number 52 and the fourth symbols 57, 59 may have the same size, or the reserved number 52 may be smaller than the fourth symbol 57, 59.

When the game control unit 100 performs the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 41. At the same time, a variation start command including the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. In response to receiving this variation start command, the effect control unit 130 initiates variation of the three decorative symbols 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 (t0 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23 (B)). Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the plurality of hold icons 51 are moved to the right side, and the rightmost hold icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53. Further, the number of holdings indicated by the holding number 52 decreases in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command.

During the period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 55 to the establishment of reach (between t0 to t1 in FIG. 21 and between FIGS. 23 (B) to (C)), the pre-reach effect is performed. In the pre-reach effect, the three decorative symbols 55 (the size is "medium" and the decorative symbol 55 with a character) that has been stopped and displayed start to change in response to the reception of the change start command. The situation is displayed. After the three decorative symbols 55 start to change, the three decorative symbols 55 change at high speed in the same mode as at the start of the change (that is, the size is "medium" and the character is present). In addition, in the pre-reach effect, a notice effect (display of a notice image and an effect of operating the movable accessory 7) suggesting the possibility of a big hit is performed, and a pseudo change effect is performed in which the decorative symbol 55 is simulated. I get sick.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation of the three decorative symbols 55, the same type of decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped on the left and right to establish reach (t1 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23 (C)). For example, before the reach is established, the decorative symbol 55 on the left side of the three decorative symbols 55 slowly moves from the upper part of the screen and temporarily stops in the area on the left side of the screen, and then the decorative symbol 55 on the right side moves. Move slowly and temporarily stop in the area on the right side of the screen. Then, a voice indicating that the reach is established is output, and an image indicating that the reach is established is displayed. At this time, the small symbol 56 is not displayed in the reach mode, and the three small symbols are displayed in a fluctuated state. When the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in the reach mode, the small symbol 56 may also be displayed in the reach mode.

The outline of the reach effect will be described below, but the details of the reach effect after the reach is established will be described later.

When the reach is established, the N reach effect is performed (t1 to t2 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23 (D)). During the N reach production, the display shows how the decorative symbol 55 in the middle area moves from the top to the bottom of the screen while the decorative symbol 55 is "medium" in size to the left and right and has a character. (FIGS. 23 (D) and (E)). As a result, the player is expected to stop the decorative symbol 55 of the same type as the left and right in the middle region. Further, during the N reach effect, a normal background image is displayed.

After the N reach effect, the SP development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is developed (t2 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23 (F)). For example, at the end of the N reach effect, the effect is performed as if the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region slowly moves and stops in the middle region, and the speed of the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region increases (FIG. 21). At t2), the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region fluctuates at high speed again, so that the SP development effect is performed. When the SP development effect is performed, for example, the left and right decorative symbols 55 move to the left and right at the upper part of the screen while being reduced, as shown in FIG. 23 (F). At this time, the character images added to the left and right decorative symbols 55 are separated and changed to the character-less mode. That is, in the SP development effect, the left and right decorative symbols 55 have a size of "medium" and change from a mode with a character to a mode with a size "small" and no character.

After the SP development effect is performed, the SP reach effect is started (t3 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23 (G)). During the SP reach production, the left and right decorative symbols 55 are "small" in size and temporarily stop on the left and right sides of the screen in a manner without characters, and a video production according to the SP reach production is performed in the center of the screen. .. Further, during the SP reach effect, the SP background image for the SP reach effect is displayed. During the SP reach production, a production that makes the player expect a big hit is performed. For example, in the SP reach effect, an effect in which a 2D animation character performs a predetermined operation is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (G), the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are hidden after the SP reach effect is started. During the SP reach effect, the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed, or only the holding icon 51 may be hidden and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed.

When the SP reach effect is completed, an SPSP development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is developed is performed (t4 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23 (H)). For example, in the SPSP development effect, a title related to the SPSP reach effect to be executed may be displayed. The display mode of this title may indicate the reliability of the jackpot.

After the SPSP development effect is performed, the SPSP reach effect is started (t5 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23 (I)). For example, during the SPSP reach production, the left and right decorative symbols 55 are "small" in size and are displayed by temporarily stopping on the left and right sides of the screen in a character-less manner, and a big hit is given to the player in the center of the screen. The expected 3D video is displayed. Further, during the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP background image for the SPSP reach effect is displayed. The hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed during the SP reach effect, or the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be hidden according to the start of the SPSP reach effect. Alternatively, only the hold icon 51 may be hidden.

When the SPSP reach effect is performed for a predetermined time, as a result of the SPSP reach effect, a winning notification for notifying whether or not it is a big hit is performed (t7 in FIG. 21). Specifically, the final stage of the SPSP reach effect and immediately before the winning notification is performed (t6 in FIGS. 21 and 22 and 24 (J) in FIG. 22). For example, in the determination effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (J), an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the effect button 26 is performed. The operation promotion effect includes an operation promotion image 65 and an effective period image 651 showing an effective period of the operation for the effect button 26. Then, when it is determined as a big hit in the special symbol determination according to the operation on the effect button 26 or the elapse of the effective time of the operation (that is, the variation pattern OP4 is selected. (Case), as a winning notification, a hit notification for notifying a big hit is performed (t7 in FIG. 22). It should be noted that the operation promotion effect does not have to be performed in the decision effect. When the operation promotion effect is performed in the determined effect, the reliability of the big hit may be higher than when the operation promotion effect is not performed. When the operation promotion effect is not performed, the winning notification is performed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the determined effect regardless of whether or not the effect button 26 is operated.

In the hit notification, the jackpot is notified by the symbol matching effect in which the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned (t7 to t8 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24 (K)). In the pattern matching effect, decorative symbols 55 of the same type as the left and right are temporarily stopped in the middle area of the screen. The three decorative symbols 55 when the symbol matching effect is performed are the character-less modes. As shown in FIG. 24 (K), when the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, the decorative symbol 55 larger than the left and right decorative symbols 55 is displayed, and the effect of emphasizing the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region is displayed. Image 60 is displayed. For example, the effect image 60 is an image displayed around the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region, such that the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region emits light, and is a brighter image than the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region. be. Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (K), even when three decorative symbols 55 of the same type are aligned, the three small symbols 56 are undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The small symbol 56 may be temporarily stopped in the big hit mode (“333”) at the timing when the hit notification shown in FIG. 24 (K) is performed. In this case, the three small symbols 56 swing in the same manner as the decorative symbol 55 in the form of a big hit after the timing of the hit notification shown in FIG. 24 (K), and when the decorative symbol 55 is stopped. This may be stopped at (when the stop display of the special symbol is displayed).

At time t7 in FIG. 22, the jackpot may be notified by the accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory 7 is operated, instead of the symbol alignment effect. In the accessory operation effect, for example, the movable accessory 7 appears on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the screen is almost entirely covered with the movable accessory 7. As a result, the player is notified of the jackpot. When the jackpot is notified by the accessory operation effect instead of the symbol alignment effect, the left and right decorative symbols 55 may be hidden during the SPSP reach effect (FIGS. 23 (H) to 24 (J)). .. In this case, although the small symbol 56 is displayed, even if the left and right decorative symbols 55 are not displayed and the moving image effect for the SPSP reach effect (for example, the effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character) is displayed. good. Further, when the left and right decorative symbols 55 are hidden during the SPSP reach effect, the small symbols 56 may also be hidden. Then, in the final stage of the SPSP reach effect (FIG. 24 (J)), for example, an effect of inciting whether or not the attack of the ally character is successful is performed, and at time t7 of FIG. 22, the character operation effect is performed. Will be.

Further, the pattern matching effect may be performed immediately after the character matching effect is performed, or the character matching effect may be performed immediately after the pattern matching effect is performed.

After the pattern alignment effect (or / and the accessory operation effect), the first light emission effect, which is a kind of hit light emission effect, is performed (t8 in FIG. 22 and FIG. 24 (L)). The first light emitting effect is an effect performed on the decorative symbol 55 when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode, and is an effect that emphasizes the decorative symbol 55. Here, "when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in the form of a big hit" is a case where the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in the form of a big hit and a case where the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in the form of a big hit. And the case where the decorative symbol 55 is just before being displayed in the form of a jackpot. That is, the first light emitting effect may be started in a state where the decorative symbol 55 of the jackpot aspect shown in FIG. 24 (L) is displayed, or the decorative symbol 55 of the jackpot aspect shown in FIG. 24 (L) may be started. The first light emission effect may be started at the displayed timing. Further, the first light emission effect may be started immediately before the decorative symbol 55 of the jackpot aspect shown in FIG. 24 (L) is displayed. For example, in the first light emitting effect, an effect image 61 (for example, a white image) brighter than the decorative symbol 55 itself is placed around each decorative symbol 55 so that the surroundings of the three decorative symbols 55 emit light in a common emission color. It may be an effect to be displayed. The effect image 61 is added to each of the three decorative symbols 55. The effect image 61 in the first light emission effect may be an image different from the effect image 60 in the pattern matching effect, or may be the same image. Further, the first light emitting effect may be an effect in which the decorative symbol 55 itself emits light. The rainbow-colored effect image 61 suggesting a big hit may be displayed by the first light emission effect.

Further, in the first light emitting effect, the three decorative symbols 55 are "large" in size and are displayed in a character-free manner. Specifically, it is larger than the left and right decorative symbols 55 during the SPSP reach effect, the three decorative symbols 55 during the pre-reach effect, and the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region when the symbols shown in FIG. 24 (K) are aligned. As described above, the three decorative symbols 55 are enlarged and displayed, and the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region is displayed larger than the left and right decorative symbols 55. In the first light emitting effect, it is displayed that the three decorative symbols 55 are magnified so as to move from the back to the front of the screen. After the three decorative symbols 55 are enlarged to the maximum, the three decorative symbols 55 are reduced so as to move from the front to the back of the screen. Further, along with the first light emission effect, the first hit light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. In the present embodiment, the display time of the effect image 60 related to the first light emission effect and the output time of the first hit light emission effect sound are the same. The relationship between these times may be any relationship, and for example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time. Further, during the first light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. In addition, during the execution of the first light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in the mode of a big hit. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode at the timing when the first light emission effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in the manner of a big hit before the first light emitting effect is started (for example, at time point t7), and the temporary stop state may be continued even during the first light emitting effect. Further, the small symbol 56 may be hidden during the first light emission effect.

The first light emission effect is performed by reproducing a moving image stored in advance. Specifically, a moving image of the decorative symbol for the first light emission effect (moving image such that the decorative symbol 55 emits light) is stored in advance in the image acoustic control unit 140, and the moving image is reproduced to perform the first. Luminous effect is performed. The decorative symbol 55 and the effect image 61 are stored in advance in the image / acoustic control unit 140 of the gaming machine 1, and the image / acoustic control unit 140 displays the effect image 61 around the decorative symbol 55 to cause the first light emission. The production may be performed.

Then, when the first light emission effect is completed (when the effect image 61 is hidden), as shown in FIG. 24 (M), the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in a mode of "medium" size (FIG. FIG. 22 t9). In this state, the three decorative symbols 55 do not stop completely but swing on the screen. At this time, the three decorative symbols 55 may have a character-less mode or a character-bearing mode. For example, the three decorative symbols 55 in the characterless aspect shown in FIG. 24 (L) may be reduced, and the three decorative symbols 55 in the characterless aspect may swing in FIG. 24 (M). Alternatively, after the three decorative symbols 55 having no character are displayed in FIG. 24 (L), the background is switched to a background image (or a normal background image) for a jackpot, and in FIG. 24 (M), there is a character. The three decorative symbols 55 of the embodiment may swing. When switching to the normal background image in FIG. 24 (M), the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be displayed again.

After the predetermined rocking period has elapsed, the second light emitting effect, which is a kind of hit light emitting effect, is then performed (t10 in FIG. 22 and FIG. 24 (N)). The second light emitting effect is an effect performed on the decorative symbol 55 in a state where the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode, and is an effect that emphasizes the decorative symbol 55. The second light emission effect is an effect in which each of the three decorative symbols 55 emits light in a common emission color, which is different from the first light emission effect. For example, in the second light emission effect, an effect image 62 (for example, a white image) brighter than the decorative symbol 55 itself may be added to each of the three decorative symbols 55. Further, in the second light emitting effect, a moving image effect may be used in which a part of the decorative symbol 55 emits light and the light emitting portion moves from the top to the bottom. The decorative symbol 55 and the effect image 62 are stored in advance in the image / acoustic control unit 140 of the gaming machine 1, and the image / acoustic control unit 140 draws the effect image 62 on a layer in front of or behind the decorative symbol 55. , The second light emission effect may be performed. Alternatively, a moving image of the decorative symbol for the second light emission effect (moving image such that the decorative symbol 55 emits light) is stored in advance in the image acoustic control unit 140, and the moving image is reproduced to play the three decorative symbols 55. A second light emission effect may be performed in which each of the light is emitted. The rainbow-colored effect image 62 suggesting a big hit may be displayed by the second light emission effect.

Further, in the second light emitting effect, the three decorative symbols 55 may be displayed in a mode having a size "medium" and with a character, or may be displayed in a mode having a size "medium" and without a character. You may. Even during the second light emission effect, the three decorative symbols 55 remain swaying. Further, along with the second light emission effect, a second hit light emission effect sound different from the first hit light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. The second hit light emission effect sound may be the same effect sound as the first hit light emission effect sound. In the present embodiment, the display time of the effect image 62 related to the second light emission effect and the output time of the second hit light emission effect sound are the same. The relationship between these times may be any relationship, and for example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time. Further, during the execution of the second light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. In addition, during the execution of the second light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in the manner of a big hit as in the decorative symbol 55. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode at the timing when the second light emission effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in the manner of a big hit before the second light emission effect is started (for example, at time point t7), and the temporary stop state may be continued during the second light emission effect. Further, the small symbol 56 may be hidden during the second light emission effect.

When the second light emission effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 24 (O), the three decorative symbols 55 swing in a mode of "medium" size (t11 in FIG. 22). At this time, the mode of the three decorative symbols 55 is the same as that at the time of the second light emission effect. Then, when the predetermined rocking period elapses, the game control unit 100 stops the special symbol and sends a fluctuation stop command to the effect control unit 130, the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped, and the three small symbols are stopped. 56 also stops (t12 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24 (P)). Here, the main stop means that the three decorative symbols 55 are completely stopped. In addition, in response to this fluctuation stop command, the fourth symbol 57 also fluctuates and stops, and is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit.

When a predetermined fixed stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game control unit 100 sends an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game to the effect control unit 130, and the relevant In response to receiving the opening command, the effect control unit 130 starts the effect effect (t13 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24 (Q)). Then, when the opening period elapses, the jackpot game that opens the jackpot 13 is started. In response to the start of the jackpot game, the game control unit 100 transmits a round start command for the first round to the effect control unit 130, and the effect control unit 130 starts the jackpot effect in response to the round start command. ..

In this way, during the hit notification, the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect) is performed on the decorative symbol 55.

When the hit notification is performed, in addition to the image effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5, a light emission effect (lamp light emission effect) is performed in which the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light in a manner suggesting a big hit. Will be. The lamp light emission effect using the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 is performed for a predetermined period from the hit notification at time t7. For example, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 include a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light in a plurality of emission colors, and in the lamp emission effect, the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 has a predetermined emission pattern suggesting a big hit ( For example, the light emitting pattern is such that the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits rainbow colors. The details of the lamp emission effect during the hit notification will be described later.

If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, after FIG. 24 (J), the three decorative symbols 55 are not aligned and the loss is notified. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing details of the loss notification performed as a result of the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 26 is an effect following FIG. 23, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a loss notification is performed.

As shown in FIG. 25, at time t7, the loss notification is performed by the pattern irregularity effect in which the three decorative symbols 55 are not aligned. In the pattern irregularity effect, the decorative symbols 55 different from the left and right decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in the middle region, resulting in reach loss (FIG. 26 (K-2)). At this time, the effect image 60 attached to the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region shown in FIG. 24 (K) is not displayed. When the reach loss stitch is displayed, an effect image different from or the same as the effect image 60 may be displayed on the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region. Further, even when the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. The small symbol 56 may be temporarily stopped in the mode of loss (“343”) at the timing when the loss notification is performed as shown in FIG. 26 (K-2). After the pattern irregularity is produced, the background is switched to the normal background image, and the three decorative patterns 55 (reach loss eyes) indicating the reach loss are temporarily stopped in the center of the screen and oscillate (t8-2 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (L-2)). At the timing when the screen is switched to the normal background, the three decorative symbols 55 are "medium" in size and return to the character-bearing mode. At this time, the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are also displayed again. Also, at time point 8-2, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed.

Then, when a predetermined swing period elapses, a fluctuation stop command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130, and in response to receiving the fluctuation stop command, the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped. The three small symbols 56 also stop (t8-3 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (M-2)). Further, when the right of the special symbol determination is reserved, the special symbol determination related to the right is performed, and the variation start command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. In response to this fluctuation start command, the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped are variable-started (FIG. 26 (N-2)).

The swing period (period from time t8-2 to t8-3) in the loss notification may be shorter or longer than the swing period (period from time t9 to t10) after the first light emission effect in the hit notification. You may.

In addition, during the swing period in the loss notification, a resurrection fanning effect that makes the player expect a resurrection effect may be performed. The revival effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped (temporarily lost) in a lost manner after the determined effect, and then a big hit is notified. If it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination, the revival effect may be performed after the revival fanning effect, and the big hit may be notified. For example, an accessory operation effect may be performed as a revival effect. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol is lost, the revival effect is not performed after the revival fanning effect, and the variable effect ends. When the revival fanning effect or the revival effect is performed, the above-mentioned rocking period (period from time t8-2 to t8-3) is the rocking period (time t9 to t10) after the first light emission effect in the hit notification. It may be longer than the period).

(Re-lottery production during winning notification)
A re-lottery effect may be performed during the hit notification shown in FIGS. 22 and 24 (K). The re-lottery effect is an effect indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and is an effect that makes the player expect whether or not the types of the three decorative symbols 55 will be changed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type of jackpot is suggested by the type of the decorative symbol 55 when the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned. For example, the "7" symbol is a symbol indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot, which is the most advantageous jackpot for the player, the odd symbol is a symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot or the 4R probability variation jackpot), and the even symbol is an even symbol. 4R It is a symbol that suggests the possibility of a normal jackpot. Therefore, the re-lottery effect is an effect that makes the player expect whether or not it is an advantageous jackpot.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the re-lottery effect is performed during the hit notification. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the re-lottery effect is performed during the hit notification.

As shown in FIG. 27, after the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, the jackpot is notified by the pattern alignment effect and / or the accessory operation effect, and then the first light emission effect is performed at time T8-1. (Fig. 28 (A)). After the first light emission effect is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned and swing in the center of the screen (FIG. 28 (B)), and the re-lottery effect is performed at time T8-2 (FIG. 28 (C)). )).

In the re-lottery effect, for example, a plurality of symbol rows (for example, a symbol row of "333" and a symbol row of "444") in which three decorative symbols 55 of the same type are aligned in the horizontal direction are displayed, and the plurality of symbol rows are displayed on the screen. The state of moving from the top to the bottom of is displayed. Even during this re-lottery effect, the three small symbols 56 are changing at high speed. Then, after the re-lottery effect is performed for a predetermined time, at time T8-3, as a result of the re-lottery effect, the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned and temporarily stopped, and the first light emission effect is performed (FIG. 28 (FIG. 28). D)). The second first light emission effect (FIG. 28 (D)) performed at time T8-3 and the first first light emission effect (FIG. 28 (A)) performed at time T8-1 are the same effect. It may be, or it may be a different production. Further, even during the second first light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 are changing at high speed. During this second first light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in the same jackpot mode as the three decorative symbols 55. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped at the timing when the second first light emission effect is started or after the first light emission effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the second first light emission effect is started, and the temporary stop state may be maintained even during the second first light emission effect.

For example, when the type of the decorative symbol 55 displayed in the second first light emitting effect is different from the type of the decorative symbol 55 displayed in the first first light emitting effect, the second first light emitting effect and 1 The effect mode may be different from that of the first light emission effect of the first time. Even-numbered symbols suggesting a 4R normal jackpot are displayed during the first first light emission effect, and odd-numbered symbols (odd symbols other than the "7" symbol) and 10R probability-variable jackpots suggesting a 4R probability variation jackpot during the second first emission effect. When the "7" symbol suggesting the above is displayed, the first light emitting effect of the first time and the first light emitting effect of the second time may be different production modes. Specifically, in this case, the second first light emitting effect may be more flashy than the first first light emitting effect. In the second first light emission effect, the flashy effect is performed when the "7" symbol suggesting the 10R probability variation jackpot is displayed than when the odd number symbol suggesting the 4R probability variation jackpot is displayed. May be. That is, when the upgrade (notifying that the jackpot is more advantageous for the player) is performed by the re-lottery effect, the first light emission effect before the upgrade performed at time T8-1 and the time T8-3. A different effect may be performed from the first light emission effect after the upgrade. For example, in the first light emission effect before the upgrade, the white effect image 61 is displayed around the decorative symbol 55, while in the first light emission effect after the upgrade, the rainbow-colored effect image 61 is displayed around the decorative symbol 55. It may be displayed. Further, the decorative symbol 55 may be displayed larger in the first light emission effect after the upgrade than in the first light emission effect before the upgrade.

On the other hand, if an even number symbol suggesting a 4R normal jackpot is displayed at the time of the first first light emission effect and the same even number symbol is displayed at the time of the second second light emission effect, the first light emission effect and 2 The first light emission effect of the first time may be the same effect mode. Alternatively, in this case, the second first light emission effect may be a more modest effect than the first first light emission effect. For example, in the first first light emitting effect, a relatively large decorative symbol 55 is displayed and a relatively bright color effect image 61 is displayed, and in the second first light emitting effect, a relatively small decorative symbol 55 is displayed. At the same time, the effect image 61 having a relatively dark color may be displayed.

After the second first light emission effect is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned and swing in the center of the screen (t9 in FIG. 27, FIG. 28 (E)). Then, the second light emission effect is performed (FIG. 28 (F)). After FIG. 28 (F), the same effect as that after FIG. 24 (N) is performed.

In this way, the first light emission effect may be performed twice during the hit notification. Even in this case, the second light emission effect is performed only once.

(Hit notification by stopping the special symbol)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special symbol is prepared in addition to the decorative symbol 55 represented by numbers such as “1” to “9” symbols. In the following, the hit notification by stopping the special symbol will be described.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flow of a variable effect including a special effect. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing details of a hit notification performed as a result of a special effect. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including the special effect shown in FIG. 29 is performed. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including a special effect is performed. As described above, the variation effect including the special effect is executed when the variation pattern OP3 or RP3 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 29, as in FIG. 21, after the start of the change of the special symbol, each effect is performed in the order of the pre-reach effect and the N reach effect (t0 to t2 in FIG. 29), and the SP reach effect is performed at time t3. Is started (FIG. 31 (A)). FIG. 31 (A) is an image similar to FIG. 23 (G).

After the SP reach effect is started, instead of the SPSP development effect, a temporary loss is notified by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol 55 different from the left and right decorative symbols 55 in the center of the screen (T4 in FIG. 29). -1, FIG. 31 (B)). After that, a special development fanning effect is performed that makes the player expect whether or not it will develop into a special effect (T5-1 in FIG. 29). After the special development fanning effect, the special effect is started (T5-2 in FIG. 29, FIG. 31 (C)). In the special effect, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the player is expected to stop the special symbol (FIG. 31 (D)). Alternatively, in the special effect, the player may expect the special symbol to change from an unclear state to a clear state. Here, the special symbol is an image that does not include a numerical symbol and is a symbol composed of images such as characters and characters, and is a symbol that suggests the possibility of both a 4R probability variation jackpot and a 4R normal jackpot, for example. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special effect, the winning notification is performed (T7-1 in FIG. 29). Even when the temporary loss is notified by T4-1, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. Further, even during the execution of the special effect, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed.

When the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, a hit notification is performed as a winning notification (T7-1 in FIG. 30). Specifically, at time T7-1, the special symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 31 (E)). Alternatively, as a hit notification, the special symbol may be changed to a clear state. As a result, the player is notified of the jackpot. Even when this special symbol temporarily stops, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the special symbol is stopped, the three small symbols 56 may also be temporarily stopped. In this case, a small symbol (special small symbol) corresponding to the special symbol displayed large in the center of the screen may be temporarily stopped in the lower left area of the screen.

When the special symbol is displayed, the first light emission effect is performed (T7-2 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31 (F)). For example, the first light emission effect is performed after the special symbol is temporarily stopped or at the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped. The first light emitting effect performed here is an effect performed on a special symbol, and is an effect of emphasizing the special symbol. For example, the first light emitting effect for a special symbol is an effect of displaying an effect image 63 (for example, a white image) brighter than the special symbol itself around the special symbol so that the periphery of the special symbol emits light with a predetermined emission color. It may be. The effect image 63 is an image different from the effect image 61 added to each of the three decorative symbols 55 in FIG. 24 (L). Further, during the first light emission effect for the special symbol, the special symbol is enlarged and displayed. The effect image 63 in the first light emission effect for the special symbol and the effect image 61 in the first light emission effect (FIG. 24 (L)) when the symbols are aligned may be the same image. Even during the first light emission effect for the special symbol, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. The three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped during the first light emission effect. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped at the timing when the first light emission effect is started or after the first light emission effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the first light emission effect is started, and the temporary stop state may be maintained even during the first light emission effect.

When the first light emission effect is completed, the special symbol temporarily stops at the center of the screen and swings (T7-3 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31 (G)). After the predetermined rocking period has elapsed, the second light emission effect is then performed (T7-4 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31 (H)). The second light emitting effect is an effect performed on a special symbol and emphasizes the special symbol. For example, the second light emitting effect for the special symbol is an effect in which the effect image 64 is added to the special symbol so that a part of the special symbol emits light with a predetermined emission color. The effect image 64 may be the same image as the effect image 62 added to each of the three decorative symbols 55 in FIG. 24 (N), or may be a different image. Even during the second light emission effect for the special symbol, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. The three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped during the second light emission effect. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped at the timing when the second light emission effect is started or after the second light emission effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the second light emission effect is started, and the temporary stop state may be maintained even during the second light emission effect.

When the second light emission effect is completed, the special symbol swings in the center of the screen (T7-5 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31 (I)), and then the special symbol stops in response to the stop of the special symbol and becomes small. The symbol 56 also stops (T7-6 in FIG. 30).

If the jackpot is notified by a special symbol, the second light emission effect may not be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, after the first light emission effect is performed at time T7-2, the special symbol swings in the center of the screen (FIG. 32 (G)), and then the second light emission is performed. The special symbol stops in response to the stop of the special symbol without any effect, and the small symbol 56 also stops as a special small symbol corresponding to the special symbol (FIG. 32 (G-2)).

Further, although not shown, if the big hit is notified by a special symbol, the first light emission effect may not be performed. In this case, the first light emission effect may not be performed at time T7-2, and the second light emission effect may be performed at time T-4. Further, when the jackpot is notified by the special symbol, both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect may not be performed.

If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the special symbol does not stop (or the special symbol is not displayed in a clear state) in FIG. 31 (E), and the first light emission effect and the second light emission are performed. The decorative design that shows the loss is stopped without any directing.

(Hit notification in probabilistic gaming state)
Next, the hit notification in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. Hereinafter, the hit notification performed after the battle effect in the probabilistic gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37. In the probabilistic game state, if it is determined as a big hit in the special symbol determination, a reach is established in the variable effect, and a battle effect in which the characters fight each other is performed. If it is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot in the probability variation game state, a victory effect is performed as a result of the battle effect. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot in the probabilistic game state, a battle effect is performed, and as a result of the battle effect, a defeat effect is performed. Further, even when the special symbol determination determines that the game is lost and the reach variation pattern RP5 is selected in the probabilistic game state, the reach is established in the variation effect and the battle effect is performed. In this case, as a result of the battle effect, a draw effect is performed. Hereinafter, a case where it is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot in the probability variation game state will be described.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of the variation effect when it is determined to be a big hit in the probabilistic game state. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variation effect shown in FIG. 33 is performed. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG. 34. The variation effect shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is executed when the variation pattern OP5-1 or OP5-2 is selected.

FIG. 34 (A) shows an example of an image at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed in the probabilistic gaming state. As shown in FIG. 34 (A), in the probabilistic gaming state, a decorative symbol different from the normal gaming state is displayed as the decorative symbol 55. In the probabilistic game state, the decorative symbol 55 has a size of "medium" and has no character. Further, in the probabilistic game state, a background image for probabilistic change is displayed as a background image. Further, in the probabilistic game state, characters and images urging the player to "hit right" are displayed on the screen. Further, a fourth symbol 59 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed at the right end of the screen. The fourth symbol 57 corresponding to the first special symbol is also displayed.

Further, in the lower area of the screen, a plurality of hold icons 51 indicating the hold of the right to determine the second special symbol and the changing icon 53 indicating the change of the current second special symbol are displayed. Further, at the lower right of the screen, a hold number 52 indicating the number of holds for the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is displayed. In addition, a small symbol 56 is displayed at the lower left of the screen. Since the small symbol 56 is displayed in the same manner as in the normal gaming state, detailed description thereof will be omitted below. The small symbol 56 may be displayed in the normal gaming state and may not be displayed in the probabilistic gaming state.

When the second special symbol determination is made in the game control unit 100, the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 42, and the variation start command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. Will be done. In response to receiving this variation start command, the effect control unit 130 initiates variation of the three decorative symbols 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 (t0 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34 (B)). Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the plurality of hold icons 51 are moved to the right side, and the rightmost hold icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53. Further, the number of holdings indicated by the holding number 52 decreases in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command. In the following figures, the display of the reserved number 52 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the figure.

A pre-reach effect is performed for a predetermined period (t0 to t1) from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 55. In the pre-reach effect, the three decorative symbols 55 fluctuate at high speed in the same mode as at the start of the fluctuation (the size is "medium" and there is no character) (FIG. 34 (B)), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the left region. The decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped (FIG. 34 (C)), and a reach-inducing effect of whether or not the decorative symbol 55 of the same type as the left region is temporarily stopped is performed in the right region (FIG. 34 (D)). As a result of the reach fanning effect, when the decorative symbol 55 of the same type as the left region is temporarily stopped in the right region, the reach is established (t1 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34 (E)). The details of the production after the reach is established will be described later, but only the outline thereof will be described below.

When the reach is established, for example, a battle start effect indicating that the battle effect between the character A and the character B is started is performed (FIG. 34 (F)), and the battle effect is started (t2 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34 (G)). The reliability of the probability change jackpot is suggested by the opponent's character (character B in the figure) in this battle production. During the battle production, a video production in which character A and character B fight on the screen is performed. During the battle production, the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a “small” size and without a character, for example, on the left and right sides of the screen. The decorative symbol 55 may not be displayed during the battle effect.

When the battle effect is performed for a predetermined time, the determined effect is performed at the final stage of the battle effect (t3 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34 (H)). This deciding effect is an effect of inciting whether or not the character A wins the character B, and is different from the deciding effect (FIG. 24 (J) above) in the normal gaming state. In the determination effect, as shown in FIG. 34 (H), for example, an operation promotion effect (for example, display of the operation promotion image 65 and the valid period image 651) that urges the player to operate the effect button 26 may be performed. .. This operation promotion effect may be the same effect as the operation promotion effect (FIG. 24 (J)) in the normal gaming state, or may be a different effect.

The winning notification is performed in response to the operation of the effect button 26 in the determination effect or in response to the elapse of a predetermined time. In the case of a big hit, a hit notification is performed as a hit notification (t4 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34 (I)).

Specifically, as an example of hit notification, a victory effect is performed at time t4. The victory effect is an effect of notifying that the character A has won in the battle effect. In addition, in the victory effect, a pattern matching effect in which three decorative patterns 55 are aligned is performed. Specifically, the decorative symbols 55 of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in the middle region, and the effect image 60 is displayed around the decorative symbols 55 in the middle region. The effect image 60 may be an image different from the effect image 60 (FIG. 24 (K)) at the time of hit notification in the normal gaming state, or may be the same image.

In addition, at time t4, as a victory effect, an accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory 7 is operated may be performed instead of the symbol alignment effect.

In addition, the character operation effect may be performed immediately after the pattern matching effect is performed. That is, the jackpot may be notified using the movable accessory 7 immediately after the jackpot is notified using the decorative symbol 55.

Following the pattern alignment effect or the accessory operation effect, the first light emission effect is performed (t5 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35 (J)). The first light emitting effect is an effect performed on the decorative symbol 55, and is an effect that emphasizes the decorative symbol 55. For example, the first light emitting effect may be an effect of displaying the effect image 61 around each decorative symbol 55 so that the periphery of the three decorative symbols 55 emits light with a common emission color. The three decorative symbols 55 during the first light emission effect are "large" in size and are displayed in a character-free manner, and the decorative symbols 55 in the middle region are displayed larger than the left and right decorative symbols 55.

The first light emitting effect may be the same as or different from the first light emitting effect (FIG. 24 (L)) in the normal gaming state. The execution time of the first light emitting effect (FIG. 35 (J)) in the probabilistic gaming state may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first light emitting effect (FIG. 24 (L)) in the normal gaming state. However, it may be the same.

After the first light emission effect, the three decorative symbols 55 swing for a predetermined period (FIG. 35 (K)). While the three decorative symbols 55 are swinging, the three decorative symbols 55 are "medium" in size and have no character. After that, a re-lottery effect is performed (t6 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35 (L)). In the re-lottery effect, a variable effect is performed in a state where three decorative symbols 55 of the same type are aligned, and an effect is performed in which the player is expected to stop all three decorative symbols of which type.

After the re-lottery effect is performed, three decorative symbols 55 of any one of the plurality of types are stopped together. At this time, the second first light emission effect is performed (t7 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35 (M)). Similar to the case where the re-lottery effect is performed in the normal game state, the second first light emission effect (FIG. 35 (M)) performed at this time t7 is the first light emission effect (1st light emission effect) performed at time t5. The production may be different from that of FIG. 35 (J), or may be the same production. In the second first light emitting effect, as in the first first light emitting effect, the three decorative symbols 55 are "large" in size and are displayed in a character-free manner, and the decorative symbols in the middle region are displayed. 55 is displayed in the largest size.

After the second first light emission effect is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 swing (t8 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35 (N)), and then the three decorations correspond to the stop of the second special symbol. The symbol 55 is finally stopped (t9 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35 (O)). During this time t8 to t9, the three decorative symbols 55 are displayed in a "medium" size and without a character. The time from when the first light emitting effect is performed in the probabilistic gaming state until the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped (the swing period of the three decorative symbols 55) is the time after the first light emitting effect is performed in the normal gaming state and then decorated. It is shorter than the time until the symbol 55 stops. Then, an opening effect suggesting that the jackpot game is started is performed (FIG. 35 (P)).

In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 35, the case where the re-lottery effect is performed and the first light emission effect is performed twice in the hit notification in the probabilistic game state is described, but the re-lottery effect is not performed and the first light emission effect is performed. May be done only once. Further, even in the probabilistic gaming state, the second light emission effect may be performed after the first light emission effect.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the variable effect when the second light emission effect is performed after the first light emission effect when the hit notification is performed in the probabilistic game state. As shown in FIG. 36, after the first light emitting effect is performed between the times t5 and t6, the second light emitting effect is performed at the time t7. Then, after the second light emission effect, the three decorative symbols 55 swing, and the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped in response to the stop of the special symbol. The time from when the second light emitting effect is performed in the probabilistic gaming state until the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped (the swing period of the three decorative symbols 55) is the time after the second light emitting effect is performed in the normal gaming state and then decorated. It is shorter than the time until the symbol 55 stops.

Here, the second light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state is the same as the second light emitting effect described in the normal gaming state, and is brighter than the decorative symbol 55 itself so that a part of each decorative symbol 55 emits light. This is an effect in which the effect image 62 (FIG. 24 (N)) is displayed. The effect image displayed in the second light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state may be different from the effect image 62 displayed in the second light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state.

Further, even when the second light emission effect is performed in the probabilistic game state, the re-lottery effect may be performed after the first first light emission effect, and the second first light emission effect may be performed after the re-lottery effect. .. Specifically, in this case, after the victory effect, the first first light emission effect is performed, and then the re-lottery effect is performed. After the re-lottery effect, the second light emission effect is performed, and then the second light emission effect is further performed, and the three decorative symbols 55 are stopped.

Further, when it is determined in the probabilistic game state that the probabilistic jackpot is determined, the first light emission effect may not be performed, but only the second light emission effect may be performed.

Next, a variation effect when a 4R normal jackpot is determined by the special symbol determination in the probabilistic game state will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the screen when it is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot in a probabilistic game state. As for the effect prior to the determined effect of FIG. 37 (H), the same effect as in FIGS. 34 (B) to (G) is performed.

When the 4R normal jackpot is determined by the special symbol determination in the probabilistic game state, the variation pattern OP6 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation effect is started. In this case, as in FIG. 33, the pre-reach effect, the battle start effect, and the battle effect are performed in order, and the final effect (FIG. 37 (H)) is performed at the final stage of the battle effect.

Then, after the final stage of the battle effect, the defeat effect is performed as a hit notification (4R normal jackpot notification) at time t4 (FIG. 37 (I-2)). In the defeat production, a video showing that the character A has been defeated is displayed. In addition, in the defeat production, decorative patterns different from the left and right stop in the middle area, resulting in reach loss. The reach loss stitch in this probabilistic gaming state indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is not a loss but a 4R normal jackpot. When a decorative symbol different from the left and right stops in the middle area, the effect image is not displayed around the decorative symbol in the middle area. When a decorative symbol different from the left and right stops in the middle region, an effect image may be displayed around the decorative symbol in the middle region. The effect image displayed at this time may be a different image from the effect image 60 (FIG. 34 (I)) displayed at the time of the victory effect, or may be the same image. Further, when the defeat effect is performed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are not performed. After the defeat effect, the screen switches at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the probabilistic game state, and the three decorative symbols swing in the middle area with different types of decorative symbols stopped (Fig. 37 (J-). 2)). Then, in response to the stop of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped, and the three small symbols 56 are also stopped (FIG. 37 (O)). Next, an opening effect is performed (FIG. 37 (P)), and a jackpot game related to a 4R normal jackpot is started. During the opening effect and the jackpot game related to the 4R normal jackpot, a display prompting the player to hit right is displayed. Further, as shown in the figure, a result display showing the total number of prize balls acquired by the player after the transition to the probabilistic gaming state, the number of big hits, and the like is performed. In the case of a 4R normal jackpot in the probabilistic game state, the opening time of the jackpot 13 per 1R is short (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the jackpot game related to the 4R normal jackpot, and the player wins most of the prizes. You may not be able to get the ball. Further, in the case of a 4R normal jackpot in the probabilistic gaming state, the opening time of the jackpot 13 per 1R is 29.5 seconds at the maximum, and the player may be able to obtain a prize ball for 4R. .. In this case, instead of the result display shown in FIG. 37 (P), a jackpot effect indicating a 4R normal jackpot may be performed.

(Lamp emission effect during hit notification)
Here, the lamp light emission effect during the hit notification will be described in detail. As described above, during the hit notification, the lamp light emission effect is performed in which the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light in a light emission pattern (for example, a light emission pattern that emits rainbow colors) suggesting a big hit. The lamp light emission effect related to the hit notification is performed at the timing when the hit notification is started (t7 in FIG. 22, T7-1 in FIG. 30, t4 in FIG. 33). Specifically, a command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130 to the lamp control unit 150 at the timing when the hit notification is started (for example, the timing when the operation for the effect button 26 is performed), and the lamp control unit 150 sends the command to the command. Based on this, the execution of the lamp emission effect is started.

More specifically, the lamp light emission effect related to the hit notification is divided into a pattern matching effect (or an accessory operation effect), a first light emission effect, and a second light emission effect. For example, when the effect button 26 is operated while the screen of FIG. 24 (J) is displayed, the lamp control unit 150 is shown in FIG. 24 (K) in response to a command from the effect control unit 130. A lamp light emission effect corresponding to the pattern matching effect (or the accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory 7 appears on the front surface of the screen) is executed. Next, at the timing when the predetermined period elapses, the lamp control unit 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect (FIG. 24 (L)). Further, at the timing when the predetermined period elapses, the lamp control unit 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the second light emission effect (FIG. 24 (N)). The lamp emission effect in each of these periods may be different. For example, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light in the first light emission pattern (for example, red) during the pattern alignment effect (or the accessory operation effect) shown in FIG. 24 (K), and the first light emission effect. The inside may emit light in a second light emission pattern (for example, white), and may emit light in a third light emission pattern (for example, rainbow color) during the second light emission effect. It should be noted that the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 have the same light emitting pattern (from the start of the symbol alignment effect (or the accessory operation effect) shown in FIG. 24 (K) until the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped. For example, it may emit light in rainbow colors. For example, even if the lamp light emission effect during the pattern alignment effect, the first light emission effect, and the second light emission effect is the same mode (for example, a light emission pattern in which the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits rainbow colors). good.

That is, the lamp light emission effect is performed in conjunction with the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect). Here, "two effects are linked" means that when one effect is performed, the other effect corresponding to the one effect is performed. The mode of "interlocking" may be, for example, "a mode in which the same color is used", or if a player who knows the pachinko gaming machine 1 uses a different color but sees one of the effects, the other is performed. It may be a “closely related aspect” to the extent that it can be recognized. Specifically, an example of "a mode in which the same color is used" is a board lamp with a lamp emission effect corresponding to the first emission effect in the same white color as the effect image 61 related to the first emission effect along with the first emission effect. 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light. Further, an example of the "closely related aspect" is, for example, a board lamp 25 and / Alternatively, it is an embodiment that causes the frame lamp 37 to emit light. In the present embodiment, if one effect (for example, lamp emission) can be recognized as the other effect (for example, hit light emission effect), it is included in the interlocking. For this reason, the two interlocking effects may be in a relationship in which they are dedicated to each other (that is, a one-to-one relationship), or a relationship in which one is dedicated to the other but the opposite is not true (that is, a one-to-many relationship). But it may be.

The start timing and end timing of the two interlocking effects do not necessarily have to match. The effect controlled by the image / sound control unit 140 and the effect controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are synchronized only at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined timing, the time managed by each control unit elapses. It may be controlled accordingly. For example, in response to a command transmitted at the timing when the hit notification is started (for example, the timing when the operation for the effect button 26 is performed), the lamp emission effect controlled by the lamp control unit 150 is started. After the lamp light emission effect is started in response to the command, the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamp light emission effect according to the passage of time. Further, at the same timing, the image / sound control unit 140 performs the pattern matching effect shown in FIG. 24 (K), and thereafter, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed according to the passage of time. These two effects are synchronized only at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined timing, they are controlled according to the passage of time managed by each control unit. It should be noted that the two effects may be executed while synchronizing with each other during the execution of the effects. When two effects are executed while synchronizing, for example, at the timing when the image shown in FIG. 24 (L) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, the lamp control unit 150 is displayed from the image acoustic control unit 140 via the effect control unit 130. A control command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp control unit 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect in response to the command. Further, at the timing when the image shown in FIG. 24 (N) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, a control command is transmitted from the image acoustic control unit 140 to the lamp control unit 150 via the effect control unit 130, and in response to the command. , The lamp control unit 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the second light emission effect.

The lamp light emission effect related to the hit notification ends with the start of the big hit game. Specifically, the lamp light emission effect ends in response to the transmission of the fluctuation stop command or the opening command from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130.

In this embodiment, the two effects may be "non-interlocking". For example, a specific example will be described in which the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 continuously emit light in a light emission pattern linked to the BGM that is continuously output from before the start of the N reach effect in accordance with the N reach effect. In such a case, it can be recognized from the state of the liquid crystal screen 5 that the N reach effect is being produced. On the other hand, it cannot be recognized that the N reach is being produced from the light emitting mode of the panel lamp 25 or the like. In this way, even if a player who knows the pachinko gaming machine 1 sees one of the effects (for example, light emission of a board lamp 25 or the like), it is difficult to recognize that the other effect (for example, N reach effect) is being performed. In some cases, these two effects are "non-interlocking".

It should be noted that the reliability may be suggested by the lamp emission effect related to the hit notification. For example, the first light emission pattern to the third light emission pattern of the lamp light emission effect related to the above-mentioned hit notification may be a light emission pattern using rainbow colors.

(Characteristics of hit light emission effect)
The hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect) in the normal gaming state and the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect) in the probabilistic gaming state have been described above. Hereinafter, the features of these light emission effects will be described.

The display mode of the decorative symbol 55 is different between the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect during the hit notification. For example, in both the normal gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state, the three decorative symbols 55 at the time of the first light emission effect are larger (or may be smaller) than the three decorative symbols at the time of the second light emission effect. Further, in the normal gaming state, the three decorative symbols 55 at the time of the first light emission effect may be the mode without the character, while the three decorative symbols 55 at the time of the second light emission effect may be the mode with the character. Further, in both the normal gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state, the visibility of the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region during the first light emitting effect is higher than the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols 55, while the visibility of the three decorative symbols 55 during the second light emitting effect is high. The visibility of the decorative pattern 55 is the same. Specifically, the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region during the first light emission effect is larger than the decorative symbols 55 on the left and right, and the entire (or most) of the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region is displayed on the screen. Since a part of the left and right decorative symbols 55 during the first light emission effect is not displayed on the screen, it can be said that the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region has higher visibility than the left and right decorative symbols 55. On the other hand, during the second light emission effect, it can be said that the sizes of the three decorative symbols 55 are the same and the visibility of the three decorative symbols 55 is the same.

Further, in both the normal gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state, the area where the effect image 61 in the first light emitting effect is displayed is larger than the area where the effect image 62 in the second light emitting effect is displayed. Specifically, in the second light emitting effect, the effect image 62 is displayed in a part of each decorative symbol 55, whereas in the first light emitting effect, a relatively wide area around each decorative symbol 55 is displayed. The effect image 61 is displayed in.

Further, in the normal gaming state, the decorative symbol 55 during the first light emission effect is a character-less mode in which the character is not added to the number symbol, and the decorative symbol 55 during the second light emission effect is such that the character is added to the number symbol. It is a mode with a character. The decorative symbol 55 during the second light emission effect in the normal gaming state may be in a character-less mode in which a character is not added to the numerical symbol. Further, in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 55 during the first light emission effect is a character-less mode in which a character is not added to the number symbol, and the decorative symbol 55 during the second light emission effect is also a character on the number symbol. Is not added to the character-less mode.

Further, in the normal gaming state, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are performed during the hit notification. In the probabilistic gaming state, the first light emission effect may be performed during the hit notification, while the second light emission effect may not be performed. Further, in the probabilistic gaming state, the first light emission effect may not be performed and the second light emission effect may be performed during the hit notification. In addition, even in the probabilistic gaming state, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed. For example, in the probabilistic gaming state, after the first light emission effect is performed, the second light emission effect may or may not be performed.

Further, the execution time of the first light emission effect and the execution time of the second light emission effect are different. "Execution time is different" means that the length of time required to execute each effect and at least one of the execution timings are different. Specifically, the execution time of the second light emission effect is longer than the execution time of the first light emission effect. The execution time of the second light emission effect may be shorter than the execution time of the first light emission effect.

Further, the execution time of the first light emitting effect and / or the second light emitting effect may differ depending on the gaming state. For example, the execution time of the second light emission effect may differ depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the execution time of the second light emitting effect is the same, while in the probabilistic gaming state, the execution time of the second light emitting effect may be shorter than in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, the execution time of the first light emission effect may be the same in all gaming states. The execution time of the first light emitting effect differs depending on the gaming state, while the execution time of the second light emitting effect may be the same in all the gaming states.

Further, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect to the start of the second light emission effect may be the same regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Further, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect to the start of the second light emission effect may differ depending on the gaming state. For example, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect in the normal gaming state to the start time of the second light emission effect is from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect in the probabilistic gaming state to the second light emission. It may be longer (or shorter) than the time until the start of the production.

Further, the effect mode of the first light emission effect itself and the effect mode of the second light emission effect itself are different. The effect mode of the first light emission effect referred to here may be the type, color and size of the effect image 61, and the sound output during the first light emission effect. The same applies to the production mode of the second light emission effect. For example, the effect image 61 displayed around the decorative symbol 55 in the first light emitting effect and the effect image 62 added to the decorative symbol 55 in the second light emitting effect are different images.

Further, the light emitting mode of the decorative symbol 55 is different between the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect. For example, in the first light emission effect, the entire three decorative symbols 55 emit light instantaneously (the surroundings of each decorative symbol 55 emit light instantaneously). On the other hand, in the second light emitting effect, each decorative symbol 55 simultaneously emits light, for example, from top to bottom (the light emitting portion of the decorative symbol 55 moves from top to bottom). Further, the effect image 61 in the first light emission effect is displayed centering on the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region and beyond the area of the decorative symbol 55. On the other hand, the effect image 62 in the second light emission effect is displayed in the area of each decorative symbol 55.

Further, the effect mode of the first light emission effect and / or the effect mode of the second light emission effect may be the same or different regardless of the gaming state. For example, the effect mode of the first light emission effect may be the same in the normal gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state. Further, the effect mode of the second light emission effect may be the same in the normal game state and the probabilistic game state. Further, the effect mode of the second light emission effect is the same in both the normal game state and the probabilistic game state, while the effect mode of the first light emission effect may differ between the normal game state and the probabilistic game state. On the contrary, the effect mode of the first light emission effect is the same in both the normal game state and the probabilistic game state, while the effect mode of the second light emission effect may be different between the normal game state and the probabilistic game state.

Further, the number of executions of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect performed in one special symbol variation (big hit variation) may be the same in all gaming states, or may differ depending on the gaming state. May be good. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of executions of the first light emission effect may be larger than the number of executions of the second light emission effect in one change of the special symbol (big hit variation). For example, in the normal gaming state, the first light emitting effect may be performed twice and the second light emitting effect may be performed once in one change of the special symbol (big hit variation). Further, in the probabilistic gaming state, the number of times the first light emission effect is executed and the number of times the second light emission effect is executed in one change of the special symbol may be the same. For example, in the probabilistic gaming state, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed once in each change of the special symbol (big hit change). Further, in the probabilistic gaming state, the first light emission effect may be performed once or twice in one special symbol change (big hit change), and the second light emission effect may not be executed.

Further, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect until the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped (the swing period of the decorative symbols 55) may be the same in all gaming states. , May differ depending on the playing state. Further, the swing time from the end of the first light emission effect to the start of the second light emission effect may be the same in all gaming states, or may be different depending on the gaming state. Further, the time from the start (or end) of the second light emitting effect to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 may be the same in all gaming states, or may differ depending on the gaming state. good. Further, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 differs depending on the gaming state, while the time from the start (or end) of the second light emission effect is started. The time from when the three decorative symbols 55 to the final stop may be the same in all gaming states. On the contrary, the time from the start (or end) of the second light emission effect to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 differs depending on the gaming state, while the time from the start (or end) of the first light emission effect The time from) to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 may be the same in all gaming states.

Further, when the jackpot is notified by the accessory operation effect instead of the symbol alignment effect, the first light emission effect may not be performed during the accessory operation effect. That is, when the jackpot immediately after the determination effect is notified, the jackpot is notified by using a movable accessory instead of the decorative symbol 55, the first light emission effect may not be performed. In this case, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the first light emission effect immediately after the re-lottery effect may be performed. Further, even when the re-lottery effect is performed, the first light emission effect immediately after the re-lottery effect may not be performed.

Further, in the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect, even if the type of the three decorative symbols 55 to be stopped is the first decorative symbol (decorative symbol suggesting a jackpot more advantageous for the player), the second emission effect is obtained. Even if it is a decorative pattern (a decorative pattern that suggests a jackpot that is not advantageous to the player). For example, even if three odd-numbered symbols (for example, "3" symbols) are stopped together, or even-numbered symbols (for example, "4" symbols) are stopped together, the first emission effect and the second emission are emitted. The production is performed. The odd-numbered symbol is a symbol indicating that the jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the even-numbered symbol. Specifically, in the normal game state, it is suggested that if three odd-numbered symbols are aligned, the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game, and if three even-numbered symbols are aligned, the time is shortened after the jackpot game. It suggests the possibility of shifting to the gaming state. Further, in the probability variation game state, when three "7" symbols are aligned, a 10R probability variation jackpot is suggested, and when three other symbols are aligned, a 4R probability variation jackpot is suggested. In the normal gaming state, the first light emitting effect and / or the second light emitting effect when all three odd-numbered symbols are stopped are the first light emitting effect and / or the first light emitting effect when all three even symbols are stopped. / Or it may be different from or the same as the production mode of the second light emission effect. Further, the effect mode of the first light emission effect differs depending on the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped, and the effect mode may be the same for the second light emission effect regardless of the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped. On the contrary, for the second light emitting effect, the effect mode may differ depending on the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped, and for the first light emitting effect, the effect mode may be the same regardless of the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped. Similarly, even in the probabilistic game state, there are cases where three symbols suggesting a 10R probable jackpot (a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player) are stopped, and a 4R probable jackpot (a jackpot that is less advantageous than the 10R probable jackpot). The effect mode of the first light emission effect and / or the second light emission effect may be different depending on the case where all three suggested symbols are stopped.

Further, as described above, in the probabilistic gaming state, the first symbol combination (symbol alignment) indicates a probabilistic jackpot, and after the symbols are aligned, a hit light emission effect (first light emission effect or second light emission effect) is performed. The second symbol combination (reach loss eye) usually indicates a big hit, and indicates that the hit light emission effect is not performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a first decorative symbol indicating a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot (for example, an odd number symbol other than "7") and a second decorative symbol suggesting the possibility of a 4R normal jackpot (for example, an even number). There is a symbol) and a third decorative symbol (for example, a “7” symbol) indicating that it is a 10R probability variation jackpot. When all three of the first decorative symbols are stopped, or when all three of the second decorative symbols are stopped, the effect mode of the first light emission effect is the first aspect, and the third decoration. When all three symbols are stopped, the effect mode of the first light emission effect may be a second mode different from the first mode. That is, when all the symbols other than the third decorative symbol suggesting the most advantageous jackpot for the player are stopped, the effect mode of the first light emitting effect is the same first regardless of which decorative symbol is stopped. In the case where the third decorative symbols are aligned and stopped, the effect mode of the first light emission effect may be a second mode different from the first mode. It should be noted that the effect mode of the second light emission effect may be the same even when any of the first decorative symbol to the third decorative symbol is stopped together. Further, the effect mode of the second light emission effect is also the first aspect when the first or second decorative symbol is stopped, and the third decorative symbol is stopped, as in the effect mode of the first light emission effect. If so, the second aspect may be used.

Further, when the jackpot is notified by the pattern alignment, at least one of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect is always executed in all the gaming states. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not notified due to the matching of symbols (in the case of reach loss or a jackpot accompanied by a transition to the normal gaming state in the probabilistic gaming state), neither the first light emitting effect nor the second light emitting effect is executed. Further, in the normal gaming state, the first light emitting effect and / or the second light emitting effect may be executed in the case of a normal jackpot, while in the probabilistic gaming state, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect may be executed in the case of a normal jackpot. Do not perform any of the productions.

Further, the output timing and output time of the sound (first hit light emission effect sound, second hit light emission effect sound) output in association with the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may differ depending on the game state. For example, in the normal gaming state, after the output of the first hit light emission effect sound associated with the first light emission effect is completed, the output of the second hit light emission effect sound associated with the second light emission effect is started. On the other hand, in the probabilistic gaming state, it may be possible to start the output of the second hit light emission effect sound associated with the second light emission effect during the output of the first hit light emission effect sound associated with the first light emission effect.

As described above, the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect) is executed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the hit notification. Since the hit light emission effect is terminated when the decorative symbol 55 is fully stopped, it is possible to effectively notify the player of the jackpot without obstructing the visibility of the decorative symbol 55 when the decorative symbol 55 is fully stopped. It can be done and the interest can be improved.

Although the details will be described later, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the hit light emitting effect during the hit notification, another light emitting effect for the decorative symbol 55 is performed at a timing different from that during the hit notification. By performing these various light emitting effects, it is possible to perform various effects using decorative patterns at each timing, and it is possible to raise the expectations of the player and improve the interest of the player.

(Light emission production during non-reach)
Next, the non-reach light emission effect in the present embodiment will be described. The non-reach medium light emission effect is an effect suggesting that the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the non-reaching light emission effect is performed in the "when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed" in the "when not in the reach state". "When not in the reach state" means that the reach has never been established since the variation display of the special symbol started, and the decorative symbol 55 has started the variation display again after the reach is established, so that the reach state is lost. Including cases. Further, "when displaying the decorative symbol 55" means that the decorative symbol 55 is displayed (that is, it is not hidden), the timing when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed, and the case where the decorative symbol 55 is displayed. Including the case just before the operation.

In the present embodiment, the non-reach medium light emission effect is executed when it is not in the reach state. That is, it can be executed when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a manner that does not notify that it is a big hit. In this respect, the execution timing is different from the hit light emitting effect executed when displaying the decorative symbol 55 in the jackpot mode and the reach light emitting effect (described later) executed when displaying the decorative symbol 55 in the reach mode. Further, the non-reach medium light emission effect is different in function from the chance eye effect (that is, the look-ahead chance eye effect and the chance eye effect, which will be described later) that suggests the reliability in that it does not indicate the reliability for the jackpot. Further, the non-reach light emission effect in the present embodiment can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern. In this respect, the execution conditions are different from the hit light emission effect, reach light emission effect, and chance eye effect.

When the non-reach light emission effect is executed, the effect image (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach medium light emission effect image 70") is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol 55 for a period from the start to the end. (See FIG. 39 (F)). Along with this, a non-reach light emitting sound effect (for example, a sound effect of "shuon") is output from the speaker 24. In the present embodiment, the length of the display time of the non-reach light emission effect image 70 and the output time of the non-reach light emission effect sound are the same. The relationship between these times may be any relationship, and for example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time.

The non-reach medium light emission effect image 70 and the non-reach medium light emission effect sound are output only in the non-reach medium light emission effect. The non-reach medium light emission effect image 70 is an image smaller than the effect images 60 to 64 related to the hit light emission effect. In the present embodiment, the same non-same for any of the left symbol which is the decorative symbol 55 in the left column, the right symbol which is the decorative symbol 55 in the right column, and the middle symbol which is the decorative symbol 55 in the middle row. Light emission effect sound is output during reach. For this reason, it is not possible to know which symbol sequence the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped is, depending on the light emitting effect sound during non-reach. On the other hand, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed centering on the symbol string of the decorative symbol 55 suggesting temporary stop, but is not displayed centering on the symbol string not suggesting temporary stop. For example, in the non-reach medium light emission effect suggesting that the decorative symbol 55 in the middle row temporarily stops, the non-reach medium light emission effect image 70 is displayed centering on the middle row and centering on the left column (and right column). Do not show. For example, the symbol row that does not suggest a temporary stop may be displayed so that only the edge portion of the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is applied, or the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 may be displayed so as not to be applied. good. Thereby, it is possible to suggest which symbol row of the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped by the light emitting effect during non-reach. In addition, the mode of the non-reach medium light emission effect may be different depending on the type of the decorative symbol 55. For example, the "7" symbol may have a non-reach medium emission effect image 70 and a non-reach medium emission effect sound, which are different from other decorative symbols 55.

In the present embodiment, the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light in a light emission pattern (for example, blinking white) for the non-reach light emission effect during the non-reach light emission effect. The light emission pattern for the non-reach medium light emission effect is different from the light emission pattern for other effects. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the non-reaching light emitting effect is executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 correspond to each other (interlocking) with respect to the light emission effect during non-reach.

The gaming machine 1 does not have to include the light emitting patterns of the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 for producing light emission during non-reach. In this case, the panel lamp 25 uses a light emission pattern for another effect (for example, a light emission pattern corresponding to (interlocking with) the BGM being output, or a light emission pattern when displaying a normal background image) during the non-reach light emission effect. And the frame lamp 37 may emit light. In the case of such a configuration, it is impossible to recognize that the non-reach light emitting effect is executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, it can be said that the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond to each other (non-interlocking) with respect to the light emission effect during non-reach.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the non-reach medium light emission effect differs depending on the gaming state. Specifically, for example, the execution time of the light emitting effect itself during non-reach is shorter in the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state. For example, the execution time in the normal gaming state is 1 second, and the execution time in the probabilistic gaming state is 0.5 seconds. It should be noted that the execution time of the light emitting effect during non-reach may be longer or the same in the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the light emitting effect during non-reach is shorter than the execution time of the hit light emitting effect in any of the gaming states. Depending on the gaming state (or in any gaming state), the execution time of the hit light emission effect may be shorter or the same as the execution time of the non-reach light emission effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the non-reach light emitting effect image 70, an effect (for example, a pale yellow image) corresponding to an effect (for example, a pale yellow image) in which the lower portion of the corresponding decorative symbol 55 appears to shine in the normal gaming state is supported. It is superimposed and displayed on the front side of 55 (see FIG. 39 (E)). In the probabilistic gaming state, an effect different from the above is displayed as the non-reach light emitting effect image 70. For example, an effect (for example, a white image) in which the corresponding decorative symbol 55 explodes from the lower part so that the whole looks shining is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the corresponding decorative symbol 55 (FIG. 42 (FIG. 42). See C) and (D). In the present embodiment, the non-reach light emission effect sound is the same regardless of the gaming state. However, in the case of the normal gaming state, the output time is shorter than that in the probabilistic gaming state. It should be noted that different non-reach medium light emission effect sounds may be output depending on the gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "scroll speed" of the decorative symbol 55 when the non-reach light emitting effect is started is different depending on the gaming state. The "scroll speed" is the speed when the decorative symbol 55 is accompanied by vertical movement and the switching speed when the decorative symbol 55 is switched and displayed in the same place without vertical movement. Is a concept that includes. For example, during the normal gaming state, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed for the decorative symbol 55 that has been temporarily stopped. During the probabilistic game state, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed for the decorative symbol 55 that is changing at a low speed. The low-speed fluctuation is, for example, the scroll speed (variation speed) of the decorative symbol 55 that can recognize (or easily recognize) the detailed aspects of the character image 551 and the numerical image 552. For example, the time for one decorative symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during high-speed fluctuation is about 0.5 seconds. There is a high-speed fluctuation at a speed faster than the low-speed fluctuation. The high-speed fluctuation is, for example, a scroll speed (variable speed) in which it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol 55 is variablely displayed, but it is not possible to recognize (or difficult to recognize) the detailed aspects of the decorative symbol 55. For example, the time for one decorative symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during high-speed fluctuation is about 0.04 seconds. For example, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation is the same as the fluctuation speed of the small symbol 56 (and the fourth symbol 57, 59). In this embodiment, the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped is not scrolled. Therefore, the scroll speed of the decorative symbol during the temporary stop is 0, and the temporary stop is not included in the low-speed fluctuation in the present embodiment. In addition, when it is simply described as "display", it includes a temporary stop, a low-speed fluctuation, and a high-speed fluctuation. The fluctuation speed of the small symbol 56 (and the fourth symbol 57, 59) may be faster than the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol 55 during high-speed fluctuation as long as it is faster than the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol 55 during low-speed fluctuation. It may be late.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the non-reach light emitting effect in the normal gaming state will be described. First, the execution timing of the non-reach light emitting effect in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the non-reach light emitting effect in the normal gaming state. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light emitting effect during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped at the same time in a normal gaming state. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light emitting effect during non-reach when the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in order in a normal gaming state.

FIG. 38A shows the movement of the decorative symbol 55 when the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol 55 in which the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time is selected with a probability of 100%. Along with the variable display of the special symbol, in the present embodiment, the start effect of the mode according to the game state is executed. The start effect in the present embodiment is an effect of emphasizing the decorative symbol 55 that starts the variable display by swinging (that is, slightly fluctuating) the decorative symbol 55. Further, the start effect is also an effect suggesting that the decorative symbol 55 starts high-speed fluctuation. For example, the start effect in the normal game state is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second), and the decorative symbol 55 is swung by changing the pose of the character image 551 from the start time to the end time. Further, in the start effect in the normal game state, the entire decorative symbol 55 becomes slightly larger with the start, and keeps the same size until the start effect is completed. In the present embodiment, the start effect ends in a state in which the character image 551 is in a pose different from that at the start of the start effect (that is, a pose different from that during the main stop). As illustrated in FIG. 38 (A), with the end of the start effect, the decorative symbol 55 starts high-speed fluctuation in the same mode as at the end of the start effect (FIGS. 39 (B) and (C)). reference). In the position of the size in FIG. 18, the decorative symbol 55 before the start of the start effect (that is, during the main stop) is a small "medium", which is larger than the "small". In addition, the decorative pattern 55 that has been enlarged by the start effect is a large "medium" and smaller than the "large". As described above, the decorative symbol 55 has the same mode at the start of the fluctuation and during the high-speed fluctuation in that the size is "medium" even when the start effect is executed and the character is present. As a start effect, after the pose of the character image 551 is ended, an effect of changing the character image 551 to the same pose as during the main stop may be executed at the end.

As illustrated in FIG. 38 (A), in the present embodiment, the three decorative symbols 55 start high-speed fluctuation at the same time with the end of the start effect. In the normal gaming state, the decorative symbol 55 fluctuates at high speed while maintaining the size increased by the start effect and the pose of the character image 551 after movement (see FIG. 39 (C)). The decorative symbol 55 may fluctuate at a low speed between the end of the start effect and the start of the high-speed fluctuation. Further, the execution time of the start effect may be different for each symbol string. For example, if the execution time of the start effect is shorter in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the high-speed fluctuation starts in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. Further, the aspect of the decorative symbol 55 during high-speed fluctuation may be the same as during the main stop. For example, the mode of the decorative symbol 55 may be changed to the mode during the main stop and high-speed fluctuation may be started with the end of the start effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 38 (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the high-speed fluctuation, the three decorative symbols 55 simultaneously change from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation. In the present embodiment, the aspect of the decorative symbol 55 during the low-speed fluctuation is the same as that during the high-speed fluctuation (see FIGS. 39 (C) and 39 (D)). It is not yet known which decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped during the low-speed fluctuation. For example, the low-speed fluctuation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, or the middle symbol may be delayed and the low-speed fluctuation may be started after the left symbol and the right symbol start the low-speed fluctuation at the same time. good.

As illustrated in FIG. 38 (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol 55, the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped at the same time in a loss mode in which the reach is not established. do. In the normal gaming state, the non-reaching light emitting effect for the decorative symbol 55 (in this example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol) that is temporarily stopped due to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 55 is performed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1). Executed in seconds). This suggests that the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) thereafter. When the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected, all the decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped from the start of the non-reach light emission effect until the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped due to the variation display of the special symbol. The decorative symbol 55 may be temporarily stopped suddenly from the high-speed fluctuation without going through the low-speed fluctuation.

In the normal gaming state, the stop effect of changing the pose of the character image 551 is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second) together with the non-reach light emission effect. The stop effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the character image 551 performs an operation different from the start effect (may be the same operation). In the present embodiment, the character image 551 is in a pose different from that at the start of the stop effect (specifically, the same pose as during the main stop), and the stop effect ends (FIGS. 39 (E) and (G)). ). When the stop effect is completed, the character image 551 being temporarily stopped swings by continuing the operation of inhaling and exhaling while maintaining the pose at the end of the stop effect. The numerical image 552 swings, for example, by repeating a slight enlargement and a slight reduction during the temporary stop, regardless of whether or not the stop effect is in progress. In this way, in the normal gaming state, the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops (swings) from the start of the non-reach light emitting effect. The size of the numerical image 552 may be reduced (or increased) by the stop effect. Further, the non-reach medium light emission effect may have a longer or shorter execution time than the stop effect. Further, in the stop effect, the character image 551 may be changed to the same pose as at the end of the start effect at the end of the stop effect.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the loss is selected in the normal gaming state, the three decorative symbols 55 are all stopped at the same time before the predetermined time (for example, 0.7 seconds before) the main stop. It becomes smaller to the same size (see FIG. 39 (H)). When the decorative symbol 55 is deflated as described above, the player can recognize that the fluctuation does not continue (that is, it does not develop into a pseudo-ream and is lost as it is). When the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 are deflated when a predetermined time (0.3 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the non-reach light emission effect. In the position of the size in FIG. 18, the decorative pattern 55 after deflation is a small "medium", which is larger than the "small". The decorative symbol 55 remains at this size, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.7 seconds later), the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped along with the stop display of the special symbol (see FIG. 39 (I)). When a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) is executed, the decorative symbol 55 does not have to be squeezed in the same manner as described above.

FIG. 38B shows the movement of the decorative symbol 55 when the loss variation pattern HP2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the loss variation pattern HP2 is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol is selected with a probability of 100%.

When the loss variation pattern HP2 is selected, as in the case of HP1, the start effect is executed along with the variation display of the special symbol, and subsequently, the three decorative symbols 55 change at high speed. Following the high-speed fluctuation, the left symbol first starts the low-speed fluctuation. During the low-speed fluctuation of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol continue to change at high speed. When a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the left symbol, the left symbol temporarily stops. Along with this, the non-reaching light emitting effect for the left symbol is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). At the same time, a stop effect for changing the pose of the character image 551 of the left symbol is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). The right symbol starts to fluctuate at low speed with the temporary stop of the left symbol. Therefore, during the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped (and the stop effect is in progress), the right symbol is undergoing low-speed fluctuation, and the middle symbol is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The right symbol may fluctuate at a low speed after (or before) the start of the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 38 (B), when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses from the end of the non-reach light emitting effect for the left symbol, the right symbol showing a number different from the left symbol temporarily stops. .. Along with this, the non-reaching light emitting effect for the right symbol is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). At the same time, a stop effect for changing the pose of the character image 551 of the right symbol is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). In addition, the middle symbol starts to fluctuate at low speed with the temporary stop of the right symbol. Therefore, during the non-reach light emission effect for the right symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped (and after the stop effect is completed), the right symbol is temporarily stopped (and the stop effect is in progress), and the middle symbol fluctuates at low speed. Inside. The middle symbol may fluctuate at a low speed after (or before) the start of the non-reach medium light emission effect for the right symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 38 (B), when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the non-reaching light emission effect for the right symbol, the middle symbol temporarily stops. Along with this, the non-reach medium light emission effect for the medium symbol is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). At the same time, a stop effect for changing the pose of the character image 551 of the middle symbol is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). During the non-reaching light emission effect for the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped (and after the stop effect is completed), and the middle symbol is temporarily stopped (and the stop effect is in progress). When a predetermined time (0.3 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the non-reach medium light emission effect for the medium symbol, the three decorative symbols 55 are slightly deflated so that the entire three decorative symbols 55 are deflated, as in the case where the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected. It becomes smaller (see FIG. 40 (G)). Then, the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol (see FIG. 40 (H)).

Next, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 38 (A) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39A exemplifies a state in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed while the first special symbol is on hold. At this time, the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped in a lost manner, and the small symbols 56 having the same combination as the decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped. Along with this, the fourth symbols 57 and 59 indicating the loss are stopped and displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 39 (A), in the decorative symbol 55 in the lost mode, the middle symbol may be stopped at the upper side of the screen than the left symbol (and the right symbol). When the decorative symbol 55 in the jackpot mode is temporarily stopped (and finally stopped), the three decorative symbols 55 are arranged in a straight line. The small symbol 56 is always stopped in a straight line regardless of whether it is a big hit or not. As with the small symbol 56, the decorative symbol 55 may be stopped in a straight line regardless of whether it is a big hit or not. The middle symbol in the stopped state may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol, or may be superimposed and displayed on the back side.

In the example of FIG. 39 (A), the reserved number 52 is displayed at the lower right end of the liquid crystal screen 5. In this example, the holding number 52 indicates that the number of holdings for the first special symbol determination is 3 and the number of holdings for the second special symbol determination is 0. It should be noted that the number of pending special symbol determinations shall not increase during the production illustrated in the figure. When a predetermined fixed stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the start effect is started along with the variable display of the first special symbol. FIG. 39B illustrates how the character image 551 moves and the decorative symbol 55 becomes larger due to the start effect. As illustrated in FIG. 39 (B), in the present embodiment, when the start effect is started in the normal game state, the middle symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol. Further, the small symbol 56 starts high-speed fluctuation with the start of the start effect. At the same time, an animation is displayed in which the hold icon 51 is moved to the right so that the earliest hold icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53. At the same time, the value of the number hold 52 indicating the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is decremented by 1.

As is clear from comparing (A) and (B) in FIG. 39, the size of the decorative symbol 55 is larger during the start effect than during the main stop. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 39 (C), the decorative symbol 55 during high-speed fluctuation is the same as at the end of the start effect. As illustrated in FIG. 39 (B), the decorative symbols 55 other than the decorative symbol 55 that had been stopped are hidden during the main stop and during the start effect, and the display is started at the start of the high-speed fluctuation. To.

As illustrated in FIGS. 39 (C) to 39 (E), in the decorative symbol 55 that fluctuates at high speed with the end of the start effect, the three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time via the low speed fluctuation. During low-speed fluctuation and temporary stop, the middle symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol. Since FIG. 39 is an example when the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected, the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in a non-reach loss mode. When the non-reach light emission effect for each decorative symbol 55 is executed with the temporary stop, as illustrated in FIGS. 39 (E) and 39 (F), the non-reach medium light emission effect image 70 causes the three decorative symbols 55 to emit light. The lower part looks shining. FIG. 39 (E) illustrates how the non-reach light emission effect and the stop effect are started with the temporary stop. Further, FIG. 39 (F) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 39 (E) (note that during non-reach, light emission effect and stop effect). Further, FIG. 39 (G) illustrates the state immediately after the end of the non-reach light emission effect and the stop effect. As illustrated in FIGS. 39 (G) to 39 (I), the decorative symbol 55 is deflated during the temporary stop and then the main stop is performed. The small symbol fluctuates at high speed until the decorative symbol 55 stops, regardless of whether or not the non-reach light emitting effect is executed, and the decorative symbol 55 stops in the same combination as the decorative symbol 55 when the decorative symbol 55 stops. do.

Next, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 38 (B) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 (A) exemplifies a state in which the start effect is started with the variable display of the special symbol, as in FIG. 39 (B). In this example, as indicated by the hold number 52, the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is 1, and the number of holds for the second special symbol determination is 0. The number of pending special symbol determinations shall not increase during the production illustrated in the figure. FIG. 40B illustrates a state in which the left symbol starts the low-speed fluctuation prior to the right symbol and the middle symbol among the decorative symbols 55 that fluctuate at high speed with the end of the start effect. FIG. 40 (C) illustrates a state in which a non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the left symbol is executed when the left symbol is displayed. In the example of FIG. 40 (C), the character image 551 of the left symbol moves by the stop effect using the left symbol during the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol. At this time, the right symbol is in low-speed fluctuation, and the middle symbol is in high-speed fluctuation. As illustrated in FIG. 40 (D), the low-speed fluctuation of the right symbol continues until after the end of the non-reach medium light emission effect for the left symbol (see FIG. 38 (B)).

FIG. 40 (E) illustrates a state in which a non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol is executed when the right symbol is temporarily stopped. In the example of FIG. 40 (E), the character image 551 of the right symbol moves by the stop effect using the right symbol during the non-reach light emission effect for the right symbol. At this time, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is changing at low speed. FIG. 40 (F) illustrates a state in which a non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the middle symbol is executed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped. In the example of FIG. 40 (F), the character image 551 of the middle symbol moves by the stop effect using the middle symbol during the non-reach medium light emission effect for the middle symbol. At this time, all the decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped. The middle symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol in any of the high-speed fluctuation, the low-speed fluctuation, and the temporary stop. As illustrated in FIGS. 40 (G) and 40 (H), the decorative symbol 55 is deflated during the temporary stop and then stopped.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the non-reach medium light emission effect in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 41, the execution timing of the light emission effect during non-reach in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. FIG. 41 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the light emission effect during non-reach in the probabilistic gaming state. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light emitting effect during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped at the same time in a probabilistic gaming state. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the non-reach medium light emission effect in the case where the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in order in the probabilistic gaming state.

FIG. 41 (A) shows the movement of the decorative symbol 55 when the loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol 55 in which the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time is selected with a 100% probability.

As illustrated in FIG. 41 (A), in the present embodiment, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state, the start effect is executed along with the variable display of the special symbol in a mode different from the normal gaming state. The start effect in the probabilistic gaming state is executed in a shorter execution time (for example, 0.2 seconds) than in the normal gaming state. For example, in the start effect in the probabilistic game state, the decorative symbol 55 takes an action of jumping upward (see FIG. 43 (A)). At this time, the size and shape of the decorative symbol 55 do not change, unlike the case of the normal gaming state. With the end of the start effect, the decorative symbol 55 starts to fluctuate at high speed (see FIG. 43 (B)). Even in the probabilistic game state, the size and shape of the decorative symbol 55 may be changed depending on the start effect. In the case of the probabilistic gaming state, the decorative symbol 55 may fluctuate at high speed in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative symbol 55 fluctuates at high speed (for example, a mode in which the decorative symbol 55 fluctuates at high speed by 0.1 seconds). It does not have to fluctuate.

As illustrated in FIG. 41 (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the high-speed fluctuation, the three decorative symbols 55 simultaneously change from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation. Aspects (eg, shape and size) of the decorative symbol 55 during high-speed fluctuation and low-speed fluctuation are the same as during the main stop. For example, the low-speed fluctuation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, or the middle symbol may be delayed and the low-speed fluctuation may be started after the left symbol and the right symbol start the low-speed fluctuation at the same time. good.

As illustrated in FIG. 41 (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 0.4 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol 55, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol (all are undergoing low-speed fluctuation). ) Is executed during non-reach. The non-reach light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state is started during the low-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol 55 with a shorter execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds) than in the normal gaming state. This suggests that the three decorative symbols 55 during the low-speed fluctuation are temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) thereafter. The three decorative symbols 55 during low-speed fluctuation temporarily stop at the same time in a loss mode in which reach is not established during the non-reach light emission effect. Then, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 0.2 seconds after) after the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped, the non-reaching light emission effect ends. When the loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the non-reach light emission effect is finished, along with the stop display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, unlike the case of the normal gaming state, the stop effect is not executed in the probabilistic gaming state.

FIG. 41B shows the movement of the decorative symbol 55 when the loss variation pattern HP4-1 or HP4-3 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol is selected with a probability of 100%.

As illustrated in FIG. 41 (B), when the loss fluctuation pattern HP4-1 or 4-3 is selected, HP4-2 is in the order of high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. Different from the case. For example, during the low-speed fluctuation of the left symbol, the non-reaching light emission effect for the left symbol is started in a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the right symbol and the middle symbol are changing at high speed. At the end of the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, the right symbol is undergoing low-speed fluctuation, and the middle symbol remains at high-speed fluctuation. After that, during the low-speed fluctuation of the right symbol, the non-reaching light emission effect for the right symbol is started in a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol remains at high speed fluctuation. At the end of the non-reach light emission effect for the right symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is in low-speed fluctuation. After that, during the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol, the non-reach medium light emission effect for the middle symbol is started in a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped. At the end of the non-reach medium light emission effect for the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. When the loss variation pattern HP4-1 or 4-3 is selected, the decoration is accompanied by the stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the non-reach medium light emission effect for the medium symbol is completed. The symbol 55 is finally stopped.

Comparing FIGS. 38 and 41, the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol 55 from the execution of the non-reach light emission effect to the final stop is longer in the normal gaming state than in the probabilistic gaming state. .. In the present embodiment, the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol 55 from the execution of the non-reach medium light emission effect to the main stop in the normal gaming state is the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol 55 from the execution of the hit light emission effect to the main stop. Shorter than the temporary suspension period. The temporary stop period of the decorative symbol 55 from the execution of the non-reach light emission effect to the final stop may be the same regardless of the game state, and the normal game state is better than the probability change game state. May be short.

Next, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 41 (A) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In FIG. 42 (A), when the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is 0 and the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is 3, the start effect is generated with the start of the variation display of the second special symbol. It exemplifies how it is started. The small symbol 56 starts high-speed fluctuation with the start of the start effect. It should be noted that the number of pending special symbol determinations shall not increase during the production illustrated in the figure. As illustrated in FIG. 42 (A), in the present embodiment, even if the start effect is started in the probabilistic gaming state, the mode (for example, the shape) of the decorative symbol 55 is different from that in the normal gaming state as in the stopped state. not.

As illustrated in FIG. 42 (C), in the probabilistic gaming state, the decorative symbol 55 fluctuates at high speed with the end of the start effect, as in the case of the normal gaming state. After that, when the decorative symbol 55 fluctuates at a low speed, a non-reach medium emission effect is executed for each of the three decorative symbols 55. As a result, as illustrated in FIGS. 42 (C) and 42 (D), the three decorative symbols 55 appear to shine due to the non-reach medium emission effect image 70. FIG. 42 (C) illustrates a state in which the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is superimposed and displayed on the decorative symbol 55 during low-speed fluctuation, and the non-reach light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. Further, FIG. 43 (D) exemplifies a state in which the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is superimposed and displayed on the decorative symbol 55 during temporary stop, and the non-reach light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. There is. Further, FIG. 42 (E) illustrates the state immediately after the end of the light emission effect during non-reach. As illustrated in FIG. 42 (F), the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped in the same manner as during the non-reach and light emission effect along with the stop display of the second special symbol. The small symbol fluctuates at high speed until the decorative symbol 55 stops, regardless of whether or not the non-reach light emitting effect is executed, and the decorative symbol 55 stops in the same combination as the decorative symbol 55 when the decorative symbol 55 stops. do.

Next, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 41 (B) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 (A) exemplifies a state in which the start effect is started with the variable display of the special symbol, as in FIG. 42 (B). In this example, as indicated by the hold number 52, the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is 0, and the number of holds for the second special symbol determination is 2. The number of pending special symbol determinations shall not increase during the production illustrated in the figure. FIG. 43B illustrates how the decorative symbol 55 fluctuates at high speed with the end of the start effect. Further, FIG. 43 (C) illustrates how the non-reach medium light emission effect is executed for the left symbol that has started low-speed fluctuation prior to the right symbol and the middle symbol. FIG. 43 (C) illustrates a state in which the reach fanning effect is executed after the non-reach medium light emission effect for the left symbol is completed. In the example of FIG. 43 (C), the effect for the reach fanning effect is displayed so as to extend from the lower end of the right symbol to the left and right so that the right symbol appears to emit light due to friction. FIG. 43 (E) illustrates how the right symbol slides while the reach fanning effect is completed. FIG. 43 (F) illustrates a state in which the non-reach medium light emission effect is executed for the right symbol during low-speed fluctuation, which shows a number different from the left symbol. This allows the player to recognize that the reach is established. When the non-reaching light emitting effect for the right symbol is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 43 (G) and (H), the non-reaching light emitting effect for the middle symbol is performed during the period from the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol to the temporary stop. Is executed. As illustrated in FIGS. 43 (I) and 43 (J), after the decorative symbol 55 corresponding to the non-reach light emitting effect is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped along with the stop display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 44 is a table for explaining the total number of non-reach light emitting effects for each fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state. As illustrated in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, the non-reach medium light emission effect is performed once for each decorative symbol in accordance with the fluctuation patterns (HP1 and HP3) corresponding to the simple loss in which the pseudo-ream cannot be executed. It is feasible. Corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (HP2) corresponding to the simple loss that can execute the pseudo-ream once, it is possible to execute the non-reach medium light emission effect twice for each decorative symbol. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the simple loss in which the pseudo-ream can be executed once, for example, three decorative symbols 55 are provisionally as in FIGS. 39 (A) to (G) or 40 (A) to (G). After stopping, the pseudo-ream is executed in the same flow as in FIG. 61. As each decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped by the first variation and the first re-variation, the non-reach medium light emission effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the non-reach light emission effect regardless of the gaming state not only when the reach effect is not executed during the variable display of the special symbol but also when the reach effect is executed. When the reach effect is executed, during the period from the start of the pre-reach effect to the "reach notification", the non-reach light emitting effect is performed as the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops, as in the examples of FIGS. 38 to 43. It is feasible. The "reach notification" in the present embodiment is an effect of outputting an effect sound from the speaker 24 in order to emphasize that the reach has been established. For example, in reach notification, a directing sound (for example, a voice with “reach”) that does not suggest reliability for a big hit is basically output from the speaker 24. When the reliability of the jackpot is high, a production sound different from the above production sound (for example, a production sound with "chance") may be output from the speaker 24 as a reach notification. In the present embodiment, the reach notification can be executed regardless of the gaming state.

As illustrated in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern in which the pseudo-ream cannot be executed and the reach effect can be executed (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4). Corresponding to, the left symbol and the right symbol can execute the non-reach medium emission effect once. On the other hand, the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the medium symbol is 0 times (that is, infeasible). For example, the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the left symbol is executed during the pre-reach effect. The non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol is executed when the reach is established (immediately before the reach notification). In addition, the left symbol and the right symbol correspond to a variation pattern (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4) in which one pseudo-ream and reach effect can be executed. It is possible to perform a non-reach medium emission effect twice each. For example, the non-reach medium light emission effect is executed by the first variation before the pseudo-ream is executed and the first re-variation. On the other hand, the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the medium symbol is performed once, and is executed by the first variation. In addition, the left symbol and the right symbol correspond to a variation pattern (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4) in which two pseudo-reams and reach effects can be executed. It is possible to perform a non-reach light emission effect three times each. For example, the non-reach medium emission effect is executed by the first variation before the pseudo-ream is executed and the first and second re-variations. On the other hand, the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the medium symbol is performed twice, and is executed by the first variation and the first re-variation. It should be noted that the non-reach medium emission effect corresponds to a variation pattern for a jackpot (any (or all) of OP1 to OP4 in this embodiment) that can execute three pseudo-reams and a reach effect. It is possible to execute the two pseudo-reams and the reach effect at the same timing as in the case of the fluctuating pattern that can be executed. In this embodiment, the jackpot is confirmed when the pseudo-ream is executed three times. Therefore, in order to emphasize the third re-variation rather than the non-reach light emission effect, a configuration is adopted in which the non-reach light emission effect is not executed in the third re-variation.

FIG. 45 is a table for explaining the total number of non-reach light emission effects for each fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic gaming state. In this embodiment, the pseudo-ream is not executed in the probabilistic gaming state. Therefore, the number of executions of the pseudo-ream is 0 in any of the fluctuation patterns. As illustrated in FIG. 45, it is possible to execute the non-reach medium light emission effect once for each decorative symbol in accordance with the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the simple loss (HP4-2 in the present embodiment). In addition, the left symbol executes a non-reach light emission effect once in response to a variation pattern (OP5-1, OP5-2, OP6, and RP5 in this embodiment) that can execute a reach effect (that is, a battle effect). It is possible. On the other hand, the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol and the middle symbol is 0 times (that is, infeasible). In the probabilistic game state, when the reach is established, the player has a feeling of expectation for the big hit more than in the normal game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to emphasize the establishment of reach rather than the non-reach light emission effect, a configuration is adopted in which the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol is not executed when the reach is established. In the probabilistic gaming state as well, as in the case of the normal gaming state, the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol may be executed before the reach notification.

Comparing FIGS. 44 and 45, the left symbol is capable of performing a non-reach medium emission effect regardless of the game state and the type of variation pattern. In addition, regarding the left symbol, the number of times that the non-reach medium light emission effect can be executed is smaller in the middle symbol than in the left symbol regardless of the gaming state. The right symbol has the same number of times as the left symbol in the normal gaming state, and the same number of times as the middle symbol in the probabilistic gaming state.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when the reach effect is executed, it is not necessary to execute the non-reach medium light emission effect. Further, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute the non-reach light emission effect when the reach effect is executed, and in the probabilistic game state, the non-reach light emission effect is executed when the reach effect (that is, the battle effect) is executed. The production may not be feasible.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the non-reach light emitting effect to the decorative symbol 55 that is changing at a low speed during the normal gaming state is 0%. That is, in the normal gaming state, the ratio at which the scroll speed of the decorative symbol 55 is 0 (that is, during temporary stop) at the start of the non-reach light emission effect is higher than the ratio during scrolling. In stage A, it may be possible to perform a non-reach light emission effect on the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped. Further, in the stage B, it may be possible to execute a non-reaching light emission effect on the decorative symbol 55 during low-speed fluctuation. In such a configuration, the ratio in which the scroll speed of the decorative symbol 55 is not 0 at the start of the non-reach light emitting effect in the normal gaming state can be set to 0% or more. It should be noted that the non-reaching light emission effect may be executed for the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped in the probabilistic gaming state.

In the normal mode, the stage A may be capable of executing the non-reach light emitting effect, and the stage B may not be able to execute the non-reach light emitting effect. In the case of such a configuration, the non-reach medium light emission effect can be executed with a probability of 50% (that is, the probability of being stage A) in the normal gaming state during the variable display of the special symbol, whereas in the probabilistic gaming state. There is a 100% chance that a non-reach medium emission effect can be performed.

When the loss fluctuation pattern HP1 (or HP2) is selected, the effect control unit 130 receives one of the fluctuation start commands shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B. The production pattern may be determined by a random number lottery.

In addition, there may be an effect pattern in which the right symbol temporarily stops together with the left symbol and then the middle symbol temporarily stops, or an effect pattern in which the right symbol and the middle symbol temporarily stop at the same time after the left symbol temporarily stops. ..

Further, the background image for the non-reach light emission effect may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the normal background image with the start of the non-reach light emission effect so that the normal background image appears to emit light. .. The background image for the light emission effect during non-reach may be erased at the start of the main stop of the special symbol immediately after (or immediately before the start), or may be erased at the start of the next fluctuation. In such a configuration, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 may or may not be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol 55 by the non-reach medium light emission effect.

It should be noted that the non-reaching light emission effect may be started while the decorative symbol 55 is not displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 55 may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) before (or along with the end) the non-reach light emitting effect ends, or after the non-reach light emitting effect ends, the decorative symbol 55 may be displayed. May be displayed (for example, temporary stop).

When the decorative symbol 55 is being hidden, the non-reach light emitting effect may be started along with the display (for example, temporary stop) of the decorative symbol 55.

As a start effect, an effect (for example, a white image) that makes the entire decorative symbol 55 appear to shine may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of each decorative symbol 55.

(Reach emission production)
Next, the reach light emission effect in the present embodiment will be described. The reach emission effect is an effect that emphasizes that the reach has been established. In the present embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the reach light emitting effect is performed when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed (temporarily stopped) in the reach state. That is, the reach light emission effect can be executed when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a manner that does not notify that it is a big hit. The reach light emission effect can be executed regardless of whether the reach effect is a fluctuating pattern that can be executed. In this respect, it is different from the hit light emitting effect that can be executed when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in the manner of notifying that it is a big hit in the case of the big hit fluctuation pattern.

The reach light emitting effect in the present embodiment includes a first reach symbol light emitting effect, a second reach symbol light emitting effect, and a reach line effect. The first reach symbol emission effect is, for example, an effect image 80 in which the left symbol and the right symbol appear to emit light when displaying the decorative symbol 55 in the reach establishment state (specifically, the timing according to the reach establishment). It is an effect to be displayed (see FIGS. 48 (C) to (G)). In the first reach symbol emission effect, for example, one effect image 80 is simultaneously superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol 55 for the left symbol and the right symbol. In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol simultaneously emit light in the same light emitting mode by the first reach symbol light emitting effect. It should be noted that the effect sound (for example, the sound effect of "Khan") may be output from the speaker 24 along with the display of the effect image 80. The first reach symbol light emitting effect is executed, for example, with the start of the reach notification, in a longer execution time than the reach notification. The first reach symbol light emitting effect is an effect that does not suggest the reliability of the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the first reach symbol light emitting effect is an effect that can be executed regardless of the gaming state. The first reach symbol light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state is executed while the middle symbol is not displayed (see FIG. 53 (C)). On the other hand, the first reach symbol light emitting effect in the normal gaming state is executed while the middle symbol is displayed (see FIGS. 48 (C) to 48 (G)). However, the first reach symbol emission effect is not executed for the middle symbol (that is, it does not appear that the middle symbol is emitting light). The effect image 80 may be different or the same depending on the gaming state. As the effect image 80, one image spanning the left symbol and the right symbol may be displayed. The effect image 80 may be displayed once during one first reach symbol emission effect, or may be displayed intermittently a plurality of times (the same image or different images may be displayed). Further, regardless of the gaming state, the first reach symbol light emission effect may be executed while the middle symbol is displayed.

In the present embodiment, during the first reach symbol emission effect, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light in the emission pattern for the first reach symbol emission effect. The light emission pattern for the first reach symbol light emission effect is different from the light emission pattern for other effects. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the first reach symbol light emitting effect is executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, regarding the first reach symbol light emission effect, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 correspond to each other (interlocking). In addition, a color suggesting high or low reliability may be used for the light emission pattern for the first reach symbol light emission effect. The light emission pattern in this case may be determined by a random number lottery based on the result of a special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130, may be uniquely determined according to the type of reach effect, or may form a reach. It may be uniquely determined according to the type of the decorative pattern 55.

The second reach symbol light emitting effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an effect image 82 in which the left symbol and the right symbol appear to emit light when displaying the decorative symbol 55 in the reach established state in the normal gaming state (FIG. 49). (L)). In the second reach symbol emission effect, for example, one effect image 82 is simultaneously superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol 55 for the left symbol and the right symbol. In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol simultaneously emit light in the same light emitting mode by the second reach symbol light emitting effect. It should be noted that the effect sound (for example, the sound effect "Shun") may be output from the speaker 24 along with the display of the effect image 82. The second reach symbol light emitting effect is executed, for example, in a shorter execution time than the first reach symbol light emitting effect. Unlike the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect can be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the reach is established (in the present embodiment, the SP development effect or the SPSP development effect is in progress). It should be noted that both the SP development production and the SPSP development production are one of the reach productions that are expected to be big hits. The second reach symbol emission effect is an effect executed while the middle symbol is hidden, and the second reach symbol emission effect is not executed for the middle symbol (that is, it seems that the middle symbol is emitting light). Does not look like). The second reach symbol light emitting effect is an effect that does not suggest the reliability of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, the second reach symbol light emitting effect cannot be executed in the case of the probabilistic gaming state.

In the present embodiment, during the second reach symbol light emission effect, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame is the light emission pattern for the SP development effect (or SPSP development effect) (for example, the light emission pattern corresponding to (interlocking) with the BGM being output). The lamp 37 emits light. The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment does not have a light emitting pattern for the second reach symbol light emitting effect. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize that the second reach symbol light emitting effect is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond to each other (not interlocked) with respect to the second reach symbol emission effect.

In the reach line effect, for example, when the decorative symbol 55 in the reach established state is displayed in the normal gaming state (in the present embodiment, at the same time as the first reach symbol emission effect), the left symbol and the right symbol appear to emit light. This is an effect of displaying the reach line image 81 (see FIGS. 48 (C) to 48 (F)). Since the middle symbol during the reach line effect fluctuates at high speed (or at low speed), it does not appear that the middle symbol emits light even when the reach line effect is executed. The reach line effect is started, for example, with the start of the reach notification (and the first reach symbol light emission effect), and ends with the end of the reach notification. Then, after the end of the reach line effect, the first reach symbol light emission effect ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display time for displaying the reach line image 81 by the reach line effect is the same as the time for the effect sound related to the reach notification to be output from the speaker 24. Further, in the present embodiment, the display time of the reach line image 81 is shorter than the display time of the effect image 80 related to the first reach symbol emission effect. The reach line image 81 may be displayed for the same period as the effect image 80. Further, the reach line effect may be executed after the end of the first reach symbol light emission effect (for example, after 1 second). In this case, the reach notification may be started with the start of the first reach symbol light emission effect, or may be started with the start of the reach line effect. It should be noted that even in the probabilistic gaming state, the reach line effect may be executed according to the establishment of the reach (for example, along with the first reach symbol light emission effect).

In the reach line effect in the present embodiment, the default reach line image 81, which basically does not suggest the reliability of the jackpot, is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol 55 over the left symbol and the right symbol. When the reliability for the jackpot is high, an image including the characters "chance" is displayed as the reach line image 81, for example. The reach line image 81 is an image suggesting that the reliability is higher than that of the default reach line image 81, and is a production sound output from the speaker 24 by the reach notification (for example, a voice of "chance"). Represents the same content. In the present embodiment, the reach line effect can be executed in the normal gaming state (that is, cannot be executed in the probabilistic gaming state). It should be noted that the reach line effect may be executed in the case of a probabilistic gaming state. The reach line image 81 may use a color that suggests high or low reliability.

In the present embodiment, during the reach line effect, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light in the light emission pattern for the reach line effect. The light emission pattern for the reach line effect is different from the light emission pattern for other effects. Further, the light emission pattern for the reach line effect is, for example, a light emission pattern that can be output at the same time in a manner distinguishable from the light emission pattern for the first reach symbol emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the reach line effect is executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, for the reach line effect, the liquid crystal screen 5 corresponds to the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 (interlocking). As an example, the light emission pattern for the reach line effect makes the extension lines of the left and right ends of the reach line image 81 appear to shine in the same color as the reach line image 81, and the other parts are the light emission pattern for the first reach pattern light emission effect. It may emit light. In addition, a color suggesting high or low reliability may be used for the light emission pattern for the reach line effect. The light emission pattern in this case may be uniquely determined according to the type of the reach line image 81, or a random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130 regardless of the type of the reach line image 81. It may be decided. Further, it may be uniquely determined according to the type of reach effect, or may be uniquely determined according to the type of the decorative pattern 55 forming the reach.

The effect image 80, the effect image 82, and the reach line image 81 are different images from each other. These images 80 to 82 are displayed only in the reach emission effect. The effect image 80 is, for example, an image larger than the decorative symbol 55 having a size of “medium”, and is an image in which the central portion of the decorative symbol 55 appears to emit white light and the peripheral portion emits yellow light (FIG. 48 (FIG. 48). C)-(G)). The effect image 82 is a white image that is smaller than the effect image 80 and diagonally crosses the decorative pattern 55 (see FIG. 48 (L)). The reach line image 81 is a horizontally long image smaller than the effect image 80 and larger than the effect image 82 (see FIGS. 48 (C) to 48 (F)). Images 80 to 82 are similarly superimposed and displayed on both the left symbol and the right symbol. Therefore, the visibility when these images are displayed is the same for the left symbol and the right symbol. Further, the images 80 to 82 are images smaller than the effect images 60 to 64 related to the hit light emission effect. A reduced display of the effect image 62 may be displayed as the effect image 82. The mode of the images 80 to 82 may be different depending on the type of the decorative pattern 55. For example, the "7" symbol may display images 80 to 82 different from those of the other decorative symbols 55.

In the present embodiment, for example, the execution time of the reach light emitting effect itself (that is, the total execution time of the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the second reach symbol light emitting effect) is more probable than in the normal gaming state. It is shorter when it is in a state. For example, the execution time in the normal gaming state is 3 seconds, and the execution time in the probabilistic gaming state is 1 second. It should be noted that the execution time of the reach light emission effect may be longer or the same in the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the execution time of the reach light emission effect is shorter than the execution time of the hit light emission effect in any of the gaming states. Depending on the gaming state (or in any gaming state), the execution time of the hit light emission effect may be longer or the same as the execution time of the reach light emission effect.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the reach effect can be executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively long. Here, the degree of expectation is 30 to 50% even in the highly reliable SPSP reach production. Therefore, even if the reach effect is executed, the percentage of big hits as a whole is less than half. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time is long, the appearance ratio of the reach light emission effect is higher than the appearance rate of the hit light emission effect.

The reach light emission effect may be started while the decorative symbol 55 is not displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 55 in the reach state may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) before (or along with the end) the reach light emitting effect is finished, or the decorative symbol 55 may be displayed after the reach light emitting effect is finished. It may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped).

When the decorative symbol 55 is not displayed, the reach light emission effect may be started along with displaying (for example, temporarily stopping) the decorative symbol 55.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, the reach light emitting effect in the normal gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, the execution timing of the reach light emission effect in the normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 46 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first reach symbol light emitting effect in the normal gaming state. FIG. 47 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the second reach symbol light emitting effect in the normal gaming state.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 46, the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the reach line effect are executed as the reach light emitting effect, and the second reach symbol light emitting effect is not executed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 47, the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the reach line effect, and the second reach symbol light emitting effect are executed as the reach light emitting effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach line effect is executed at the same timing as the reach notification. Therefore, in FIGS. 46 and 47, the reach line effect is not shown. Since the flow of the effect during the hit notification and the loss notification has been described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 32, the description thereof will be omitted in FIGS. 46 and 47.

FIG. 46 (A) shows a reach effect in the case where a variation pattern in which a hit is notified by the N reach effect (that is, the N reach effect does not develop into the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, or the special effect) is selected. The flow of the production is described. Corresponding to such a fluctuation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46 (A), the first reach symbol light emitting effect is feasible, but the second reach symbol light emitting effect is not feasible. In the present embodiment, the N reach effect is started during the reach notification and the first reach symbol emission effect. The N reach effect may be started with the establishment of the reach, or may be started with the start (or end) of the first reach symbol emission effect. Further, the first reach symbol light emission effect may be executed when the reach is established.

In FIG. 46 (B), a variation pattern in which the N reach effect is not executed and the winning is notified by the SP reach effect (that is, the SP reach effect does not develop into the SPSP reach effect or the special effect) is selected. The flow of the production during the reach production in the case of the case is described. In response to such a fluctuation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46 (B), the first reach symbol light emitting effect can be executed according to the establishment of reach, but the second reach symbol light emitting effect cannot be executed. Is. In the present embodiment, during the first reach symbol light emission effect, the SP development effect is started with the end of the reach notification. Further, after the end of the first reach symbol emission effect, the SP development effect ends, and the SP reach effect starts accordingly.

FIG. 46 (C) shows the flow of the effect during the reach effect when the N reach effect and / or the SP reach effect is not executed and the variation pattern in which the winning is notified is selected in the SPSP reach effect. Has been done. In response to such a fluctuation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46 (C), the first reach symbol light emitting effect can be executed according to the establishment of reach, but the second reach symbol light emitting effect cannot be executed. Is. In the present embodiment, during the first reach symbol light emission effect, the SPSP development effect is started with the end of the reach notification. Further, after the end of the first reach symbol emission effect, the SPSP development effect ends, and the SPSP reach effect starts accordingly.

FIG. 46 (D) shows the flow of the effect during the reach effect when the N reach effect is not executed and the variation pattern in which the SP reach effect is evolved into the SPSP reach effect and the winning is notified is selected. It is written. Corresponding to such a fluctuation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46 (D), the first reach symbol light emitting effect is feasible, but the second reach symbol light emitting effect is not feasible. In the present embodiment, during the SPSP development effect in the case of developing from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect is not executed in order to create a sense of unity between the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. In the present embodiment, when the N reach effect having a lower reliability than the SP reach effect develops into the SPSP reach effect, there is not much sense of unity in these reach effects. Therefore, in order to emphasize that when the N reach effect develops into the SPSP reach effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect can be executed during the SPSP development effect (FIG. 47 (C)). reference). In addition, in this embodiment, the first reach symbol light emission effect is executed at the same timing as the case corresponding to the variation pattern in which the winning is notified by the SP reach effect (that is, it does not develop into the SPSP reach effect) (FIG. 46 (FIG. 46). B) See).

FIG. 47 (A) shows a case where a variation pattern is selected in which the N reach effect develops into the SP reach effect and the winning is notified (that is, the SP reach effect does not develop into the SPSP reach effect or the special effect). The flow of the production during the reach production is described. Corresponding to such a fluctuation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 47 (A), the first reach symbol light emitting effect is executed according to the establishment of reach. The second reach symbol light emitting effect starts, for example, at the end of the SP development effect, and ends by the end of the SP development effect. The second reach symbol light emitting effect may be started with the start of the SP development effect, or may be started with the end of the SP development effect.

FIG. 47 (B) shows the flow of the effect when a variation pattern is selected, which develops from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect and further develops into a special effect to notify the winner. Further, FIG. 47 (D) shows the flow of the effect when a variation pattern is selected, which develops from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect and further develops into the SPSP reach effect to notify the winner. .. Corresponding to these fluctuation patterns, as illustrated in FIGS. 47 (B) and 47 (D), the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the second reach symbol light emitting effect are executed at the same timing as in FIG. 47 (A). Will be done. In the case of FIG. 47 (D) as in the case of FIG. 46 (D), the second reach symbol light emitting effect is not executed during the SPSP development effect when the SP reach effect is developed to the SPSP reach effect. This creates a sense of unity between the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect.

FIG. 47 (C) shows the flow of the effect when a variation pattern is selected, which is developed from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect and the winning is notified. Corresponding to such a fluctuation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 47 (C), the first reach symbol light emission effect is executed at the same timing as in FIG. 47 (A). The second reach symbol light emitting effect is started, for example, during the SPSP development effect, and ends before the end of the SPSP development effect. The second reach symbol light emitting effect may be started with the start of the SPSP development effect, or may be started with the end of the SPSP development effect.

In the present embodiment, the second reach symbol light emitting effect can be executed regardless of any of the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 47). Further, the second reach symbol light emitting effect cannot be executed in any of the SP reach effect, the special effect, and the SPSP reach effect.

The second reach symbol light emitting effect may be started with the start of the SP development effect, or the second reach symbol light emission effect may be started with the end of the SP development effect. Further, the second reach symbol light emitting effect may be executed during the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect. Further, the second reach symbol light emitting effect may be executed during the SPSP development effect in the case of developing from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect.

Next, an example of the reach light emitting effect in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the reach light emitting effect in the normal gaming state. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the reach symbol light emitting effect in the normal gaming state. 50 and 51 are explanatory views for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the second reach symbol light emitting effect in the normal gaming state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 48 (A) and 48 (B), in this example, the reach is established with the “1” symbol. Note that FIG. 48 (A) illustrates a state when the non-reach-in-time light emission effect accompanying the temporary stop of the left symbol is completed. Further, FIG. 48B illustrates a state in which reach is established by the temporary stop of the right symbol, and the non-reach-in-time light emission effect accompanying the temporary stop of the right symbol is completed.

As illustrated in FIG. 48 (C), for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the non-reach medium light emission effect for the right symbol, the first reach symbol light emission effect and the reach line. Production and reach notification are started. FIG. 48 (C) illustrates a state in which the entire left symbol and the right symbol (both have characters) are emitted by the effect image 80 related to the first reach symbol emission effect. Further, the effect sound related to the reach notification (for example, the "cha" portion of the voice of "chance") is output from the speaker 24. At the same time, the reach line image 81 is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80 from the center of the left symbol to the center of the right symbol. As illustrated in FIG. 48 (C), the effect image 80 is larger than the reach line image 81 at the start of the reach light emission effect. In this example, as the reach line image 81, for example, the characters "chance" are slightly floating. The reach notification and the reach line effect suggest that the reliability is high. In the example of FIG. 48 (C), the medium symbol and the small symbol 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. The image related to the reach light emission effect is displayed on the front side of the middle symbol and on the back side of the small symbol 56. As the reach is established, the small symbol 56 may be displayed in the same reach mode as the decorative symbol 55.

FIG. 48 (D) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48 (C). As illustrated in FIG. 48 (D), the left symbol and the right symbol continue to emit light as a whole by the effect image 80. Further, a moving image in which the reach line image 81 extends from the left edge of the screen (or the left edge of the left symbol) to the right edge of the screen (or the right edge of the right symbol) is displayed on the front side of the effect image 80. In this example, as the reach line image 81, for example, the character "chance" is clearly displayed. Further, the effect sound related to the reach notification (for example, the "n" part of the voice of "chance") is output from the speaker 24. Reach notification ends with the output of this effect sound.

In the example of FIG. 48 (D), the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol is started by starting the N reach effect. In this example, the middle symbol continues to fluctuate at low speed until after the end of the first reach symbol emission effect. The middle symbol during the first reach symbol emission effect is superimposed and displayed on the back side of the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81. Therefore, it is hidden in these images and part of it cannot be seen. Although the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81 depend on the middle symbol, the middle symbol does not appear to emit light. The middle symbol may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81 during the first reach symbol emission effect.

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 48 (D) to (G), the middle symbol during the first reach symbol light emission effect is when the first reach symbol light emission effect is not executed (for example, during the N reach effect). ) Is different. Specifically, for example, it may look dark or may have a weak contrast. It is not necessary to change the mode of the middle symbol during the first reach symbol emission effect.

FIG. 48 (E) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48 (D). As illustrated in FIG. 48 (E), the left symbol and the right symbol continue to emit light as a whole by the effect image 80. Further, as the reach line image 81 extending from the left edge of the screen (or the left edge of the left symbol) to the right edge of the screen (or the right edge of the right symbol), a moving image that becomes thin and small so that the light is focused is displayed. In this example, the character "chance" included in the reach line image 81 has already been erased. Therefore, by reducing the reach line image 81, the mode that suggests the reliability for the jackpot changes to the mode that does not suggest it.

FIG. 48 (F) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48 (E). As illustrated in FIG. 48 (F), the effect image 80 is superimposed and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, but the character image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol is beginning to appear slightly transparent. .. Further, the numerical image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80. As a result, it is possible to recognize which decorative symbol 55 the reach was established during the first reach symbol emission effect. In the example of FIG. 48 (F), as the reach line image 81, a moving image that becomes thinner so that the light extending from the left edge of the screen (or the left edge of the left symbol) to the right edge of the screen (or the right edge of the right symbol) is focused is displayed. To. The reach line image 81 is focused and erased as it is during the first reach symbol emission effect. This ends the reach line production.

FIG. 48 (G) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48 (F). As illustrated in FIG. 48 (G), the character image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol can be seen through more than in the case of FIG. 48 (F). The numerical image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol continues to be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80. The display position of these decorative symbols 55 is moved so that the distance between the left symbol and the right symbol is widened. Immediately after such a state, the effect image 80 is erased so as to pop. As a result, the first reach symbol light emission effect is completed. When the first reach symbol emission effect is completed, it becomes possible to see the middle symbol fluctuating at a low speed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol (see FIG. 48 (H)). The gap between the left symbol and the right symbol may be widened with the start of the first reach symbol emission effect (or reach line effect), or the end of the first reach symbol emission effect (or reach line effect). It may be accompanied by.

FIG. 48 (H) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48 (G). As illustrated in FIG. 48 (H), with the end of the first reach symbol emission effect, a character image 552 having the same character but different aspects from before to the end of the first reach symbol emission effect is predetermined. Display time (for example, 1 second) is displayed. After this display time elapses, as illustrated in FIG. 48 (I), the character image 552 returns to the same mode as before the start of the first reach symbol emission effect (see, for example, FIG. 48 (B)). It is further emphasized that the reach is established by such a change in the character image 552. It is not necessary to change the character image 552 with the end of the first reach symbol emission effect.

Following FIG. 48 (I), in the case of the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot is notified by the N reach effect (that is, in the case corresponding to the variation pattern OP1), for example, the effect after the pattern alignment effect with the “1” symbol alignment is executed. The hit notification is performed. Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description here will be omitted. In the case of a fluctuation pattern in which a loss is notified by the N reach effect, the temporary stop is performed at the reach loss eye, and then the main stop is performed (see FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b)). During the display of the reach loss eye, the non-reach light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are not executed. In the case of a variation pattern that develops from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect (or SPSP reach effect), the middle symbol starts high-speed fluctuation as illustrated in FIG. 49 (J).

In the case of a variation pattern that develops from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect following FIG. 49 (J), the middle symbol is hidden and the SP development effect is started as illustrated in FIG. 49 (K). To. When the SP development effect starts, the decorative symbol 55 changes from the character-bearing mode to the character-less mode. As illustrated in FIG. 49 (L), for example, the second reach symbol light emitting effect is executed at the final stage of this SP development effect. FIG. 49 (L) illustrates a state in which the left symbol and the right symbol (both have no character) shimmer from the upper left to the lower right by the effect image 82 related to the second reach symbol emission effect. In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left and right ends of the liquid crystal screen 5 during the SP development effect. For example, during the second reach symbol light emission effect, it is executed when the movement between the left symbol and the right symbol is completed. In the example of FIG. 49 (K), the medium symbol and the small symbol 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. The small symbol 56 may be displayed in the same reach mode as the decorative symbol 55 during the second reach symbol emission effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 49 (M), when the SP development effect is completed after the end of the second reach symbol emission effect, the SP reach effect is started. For example, during the SP reach effect, as illustrated in FIG. 49 (O), a chance increase suggesting high reliability may be executed. In this example, if the chance-up is not performed, the character A closes his eyes and mouth (see FIG. 49 (N), the default mode of SP reach effect). When the chance-up is executed, the character A has his eyes and mouth open (see FIG. 49 (O)). In addition, even if this chance up is executed, it may be lost (note that it may be a big hit whenever the chance up is executed). The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment does not have this chance-up light emission pattern, and even when there is a chance-up, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in the default light emission pattern. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize that the chance up is executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond to each other (not interlocked) with respect to the chance increase.

As illustrated in FIG. 49 (P), after that, in the middle of the SP reach effect, an effect in which the effect image imitating the effect button 26 is united from the left-right direction and the downward direction is executed. This effect is an effect that is executed immediately before the operation promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the execution of the operation promotion effect. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 50 (Q), the operation promotion effect is executed. This operation promotion effect may be the same mode as the operation promotion effect during the determined effect, or may be a different mode. At the start of the valid period, as the operation promotion image 65, an image imitating the effect button 26 in detail and a white effect image superimposed and displayed on the front side of this image may be displayed. For example, this effect image makes an image that imitates the effect button 26 in detail appear to shine. Then, when this effect image is erased after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds), the image imitating the effect button 26 in detail may be clearly visible. In the operation promotion effect, the image without operation and the image with operation may be alternately switched and displayed at the same position from the start to the end of the valid period as an image imitating the effect button 26 in detail. .. The no-operation image is an effect image that imitates the effect button 26 in a state where it is not operated. Further, the image with operation is an image imitating the effect button 26 in the operated state (that is, the pressed state). By alternately displaying the image in the unoperated state and the image in the operated state, the state in which the effect button 26 is operated is shown, and the player is urged to operate the button.

In the present embodiment, a cut-in image suggesting reliability is an image related to a reach effect for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) according to an operation (or according to the end of a predetermined validity period) (for example, a character). There are cases where the decorative symbol 55 is superimposed on the image) to be destroyed, and there are cases where the symbol alignment effect is executed (see FIGS. 50 (S) and 50 (T)). When a cut-in image (for example, an image displayed at the right end of FIG. 50 (S) and marked “I can't lose!”) Is displayed, the SP reach effect is executed until the final stage. On the other hand, when the pattern matching effect is executed, the SP reach effect is not executed until the final stage, and a hit notification is given in the middle of the SP reach effect. The details of the hit notification will be omitted because they have been described above. In addition, during the production related to the operation promotion effect including the effect of fanning and the effect of displaying the cut-in image, the board lamp 25 uses the light emission pattern for these effects (that is, the light emission pattern different from the light emission patterns for other effects). And / or the frame lamp 37 emits light. Therefore, in this respect, it is different from the chance-up in which the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond (is not interlocked).

As illustrated in FIG. 50 (U), after that, at the end of the SP reach effect, an effect image in which something happens is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. This effect is an effect that is executed only immediately before the decision effect, and is an effect that encourages the execution of the decision effect. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 50 (V), the determination effect is executed. This determination effect may be performed in the same mode as the operation promotion effect in the middle stage of the SP reach effect, or may be executed in a different mode (for example, a mode as exemplified in FIGS. 50 (V) and (W)) in the case of high reliability. You may. At the start of the valid period, as the operation promotion image 65, an image imitating the effect button 26 in detail and a white effect image superimposed and displayed on the front side of this image may be displayed. For example, this effect image makes an image that imitates the effect button 26 in detail appear to shine. Then, when this effect image is erased after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds), the image imitating the effect button 26 in detail may be clearly visible.

In the case of a fluctuation pattern in which a jackpot is notified by the SP reach effect, for example, depending on the operation (or according to the end of a predetermined valid period), for example, the effect after the pattern alignment effect with the "1" symbol alignment is executed. The hit notification is performed. Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description here will be omitted. In the case of a variable pattern in which a loss notification or a hit notification is given in the SP reach effect, and in the case of a variable pattern that develops from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect or a special effect, the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops at the reach loss eye (FIG. 50 (X). ) And FIG. 51 (Y)). At this point, it has not yet been determined that the decorative symbol 55 will stop in a lost manner (that is, it is a temporary loss). In the position of the size in FIG. 18, the medium symbol during temporary stop at the reach loss eye is smaller than "large" but larger "medium" to "medium" which is almost the same size as during the pre-reach production. The size changes.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the loss notification at the reach loss eye, the light emission effect during non-reach is not executed. In this respect, it is different from the fact that the non-reach medium light emission effect can be executed when the reach is not established even with the same loss notification. Further, in the present embodiment, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are not executed during the display of the reach loss eye.

In the case of a variation pattern in which a loss notification or a hit notification is performed without developing into an SPSP reach effect or a special effect, the model name display as illustrated in FIG. 51 (Z) is displayed for a predetermined execution time (for example, after FIG. 51 (Y)). 2 seconds). The model name display is, for example, an effect of dimming the liquid crystal screen 5 and displaying the characters of "ass sumo", which is the model name of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, after the model name is displayed, the loss is basically notified. For this reason, basically (specifically, in the case of a variable pattern that notifies loss without developing into SPSP reach effect or special effect), the normal background image is restored and the same reach loss as immediately before the model name is displayed. The decorative symbol 55 with a character is temporarily stopped by the combination of eyes, and then the main stop is performed (flow of FIG. 51 (Z) → (a) → (b)). During the display of the reach loss eye, the non-reach light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are not executed.

In addition, at some ratio (for example, about 30% of the jackpot notified by SP reach production), the model name display ends after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the model name display is executed, and the jackpot is hit. Be notified. In this case, for example, following the model name display, a hit notification is performed in which the effects after the symbol alignment effect with the "1" symbol alignment (or "7" symbol alignment instead of the "1" symbol alignment) are executed. .. Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description here will be omitted.

In the case of a variation pattern that develops into a special effect, the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (C) and thereafter are executed following FIG. 51 (Y) (the description thereof is omitted here). In the case of a variation pattern that develops into the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP development effect as illustrated in FIG. 51 (d) is executed following FIG. 51 (Y). In the case of such a flow, the second reach symbol light emitting effect is not executed during the SPSP development effect. In the SPSP reach effect following the SPSP development effect, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 51 (e), a state in which the character plays a butt sumo match is displayed. Then, a decision effect may be executed at the final stage (see FIG. 51 (f)). The mode of the determined effect may be the same as the operation promotion effect in the middle of the SP reach effect, or an image that imitates the protruding effect button 26 in detail may be displayed in the case of high reliability or regardless of the reliability. ..

In the case of a variation pattern in which the loss is notified by the SPSP reach effect, the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped at the reach loss according to the operation (or according to the end of the predetermined valid period) (see FIG. 51 (g)). In the position of the size in FIG. 18, the medium symbol during the temporary stop at the reach loss eye is the “medium” having almost the same size as during the pre-reach production. In the case of loss, after the model name is displayed following FIG. 51 (g), the decorative symbol 55 that has changed to the character-bearing mode is stopped and the loss is confirmed (FIGS. 51 (Z), (a), And (b)). During the display of the reach loss eye, the non-reach light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are not executed.

On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern that is notified by the SPSP reach effect, the effect after the symbol alignment effect of "1" is executed according to the operation (or according to the end of the predetermined valid period). The hit notification is performed. In the case of the fluctuation pattern in which the hit notification is performed in the SPSP reach effect, the model name is displayed following FIGS. 51 (f) and (g) in the same manner as in the case of loss (that is, the hit light emission effect is not executed). After that, a hit notification may be performed when the effect after the pattern matching effect is executed (flow of FIG. 51 (g) → (Z) → (c)). Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description here will be omitted. If the model name is displayed after the SPSP reach effect, it may be lost. That is, the model name display may be an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of loss when executed after the SP reach effect, and suggesting that the loss is confirmed when executed after the SPSP reach effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the reach light emission effect in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 52, the execution timing of the reach light emission effect in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 52, the first reach symbol light emitting effect is executed as the reach light emitting effect, and the second reach symbol light emitting effect and the reach line effect are not executed. The first reach symbol light emitting effect is executed according to the establishment of reach, as in the case of the normal gaming state. Further, the reach notification is executed with the start of the first reach symbol light emission effect as in the case of the normal gaming state. As illustrated in FIG. 52, in the present embodiment, the reach notification ends during the first reach symbol light emission effect, and the battle start effect is started accordingly. Since the flow of the effect during the hit notification and the loss notification has been described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36, the description thereof will be omitted in FIG. 52.

Next, an example of the reach light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the first reach symbol light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the first reach symbol light emission effect in the probabilistic gaming state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (B), in this example, the reach is established with the “3” symbol. It should be noted that FIG. 53 (A) illustrates a state in which the non-reach medium light emission effect accompanying the temporary stop of the left symbol is completed, and the reach fan effect is executed to incite the temporary stop of the three symbols as the right symbol. .. In the reach fanning effect, for example, an effect image is displayed in which the lower portion of the right symbol appears to emit light due to friction (see FIG. 53 (A)). After the reach fanning effect, there are cases where the reach is established and cases where the reach is not established. FIG. 53 (B) illustrates a state when the reach is established by the temporary stop of the right symbol. In the present embodiment, unlike the case of the normal gaming state, the non-reaching light emission effect accompanying the temporary stop of the right symbol is not executed in the probabilistic gaming state (see FIG. 45).

As illustrated in FIG. 53 (C), for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed from the temporary stop of the right symbol, the first reach symbol light emission effect and reach notification are started. .. FIG. 53 (C) illustrates a state in which the entire left symbol and the right symbol are emitted by the effect image 80 related to the first reach symbol emission effect. Further, the effect sound related to the reach notification (for example, the voice of "reach") is output from the speaker 24. Reach notification ends when the output of this effect sound ends. In the example of FIG. 53 (C), the middle symbol is hidden. Further, the small symbol 56 continues to fluctuate at high speed. In this example, the small symbol 56 continues to fluctuate at high speed until the decorative symbol 55 stops. As the reach is established, the small symbol 56 may be displayed in the same reach mode as the decorative symbol 55.

FIG. 53 (D) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 53 (C). As illustrated in FIG. 53 (D), the left symbol and the right symbol become smaller as a whole while being continuously emitted by the effect image 80. Along with this, the left symbol moves to the left edge of the screen, and the right symbol moves to the right edge of the screen. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 53 (E), the left symbol and the right symbol complete the movement to both ends of the screen while the effect image 80 keeps emitting light as a whole, and the symbols do not become smaller. FIG. 53 (E) illustrates how the battle start effect is started during the first reach symbol light emission effect. The effect image 80 is erased so as to pop during the battle start effect, so that the first reach symbol light emission effect ends. In the first reach symbol emission effect in the probabilistic gaming state, the number image 552 can be completely seen through the effect image 80 through the effect image 80 until the end of the effect. do not become. In this respect, it is different from the first reach symbol light emitting effect in the normal gaming state in which the numerical image 552 becomes visible in the middle of the first reach symbol light emitting effect (see FIG. 48 (F)).

As illustrated in FIGS. 53 (F) and 53 (G), when the battle start effect is completed, the battle effect is started. For example, during the battle production, as illustrated in FIG. 53 (F), a chance-up suggesting that the reliability is high may be executed. In this example, if the chance-up is not performed, there is no flag next to the character sumo wrestling (see the default mode of battle production, FIG. 53 (G)). When the chance-up is executed, a flag is raised next to the character who wrestles the tail (see FIG. 53 (F)). In addition, even if this chance up is executed, it may be lost (note that it may be a big hit whenever the chance up is executed). The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment does not have this chance-up light emission pattern, and even when there is a chance-up, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in the default light emission pattern. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize that the chance up is executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond to each other (not interlocked) with respect to the chance increase.

Following FIG. 53 (F) or (G), as illustrated in FIG. 54 (H), an image prompting the player to operate is displayed at the end of the battle effect. This effect is an effect that is executed only immediately before the decision effect, and is an effect that encourages the execution of the decision effect. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIGS. 54 (I) and 54 (J), the determination effect is executed. In this decision effect, the character whose victory effect is executed when the battle effect is won is superimposed and displayed on the back side of the operation promotion image 65 and the valid period image 651 in full screen. In this respect, it is different from the operation promotion effect (for example, the mode as exemplified in FIGS. 50 (Q) and (R)) in the normal gaming state (note that the same mode may be used). As illustrated in FIGS. 54 (I) and 54 (J), as the operation promotion image 65, a white effect image is displayed at the start of the valid period, and this effect image is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds later). When it is erased, an image that imitates the protruding effect button 26 in detail may be clearly visible.

In the case of a jackpot fluctuation pattern, for example, depending on the operation (or according to the end of a predetermined valid period), for example, the hit notification that the effect after the symbol alignment effect with the "3" symbol alignment is executed is executed. It is done (see FIG. 54 (K)). Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description here will be omitted. In the case of a variation pattern of loss, the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops in a manner indicating loss (see FIG. 54 (L)). In the present embodiment, in the probabilistic gaming state, the combination of the decorative symbol 55 in the reach state and the middle symbol showing the number obtained by adding (or subtracting) 2 to the number indicated by the decorative symbol 55 in the reach state is lost. This is the embodiment shown. In the case of the loss notification with the reach loss eye, the light emission effect during non-reach is not executed. In this respect, even in the case of the probabilistic gaming state, as in the case of the normal gaming state, if the reach is not established even with the same loss notification, it is possible to execute the light emission effect during non-reach. During the display of the reach loss eye, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are not executed. In addition, in the position of the size in FIG. 18, the medium symbol during the temporary stop at the reach loss eye is “medium” having substantially the same size as during the pre-reach production.

Subsequently, the model name display as illustrated in FIG. 54 (M) is performed with a predetermined execution time (for example, 2 seconds). In the present embodiment, the model name display in the probabilistic gaming state is slightly different from that in the normal gaming state. For example, the LCD screen 5 is dimmed, and the characters "ass sumo", which is the model name of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, and the main character (for example, character A) are displayed. The mode of displaying the model name may be the same regardless of the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the loss is always notified after the model name is displayed in the probabilistic game state. Therefore, the model name display in the probabilistic game state functions as an effect suggesting a loss. Along with the end of the model name display, a background image for probabilistic change is displayed, and the decorative symbol 55 without a character is temporarily stopped with the same reach loss combination as immediately before the model name display, and then the main stop is performed (FIG. 54). (N) and (O)). The jackpot may be notified via the model name display. In this case, within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second later) from the execution of the model name display, for example, the production after the symbol alignment effect with the "3" symbol alignment (or "7" symbol alignment instead of the "3" symbol alignment). May be notified when is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect, and the hit light emitting effect in the normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 55 is a table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect, and the hit light emitting effect in the normal gaming state. In addition, in FIG. 55, the case where the re-lottery effect is not performed during the winning notification is shown. In FIG. 55, the effect name is described under the total number of times of the above effect corresponding to the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped at the time of the reach light emission effect and the hit light emission effect. Specifically, it will be described with reference to the column of "reach establishment-> N reach-> fluctuation pattern corresponding to big hit". For example, in the fluctuation pattern of hit notification by such N reach effect, the total number of times of the left symbol is 3 times, the total number of times of the right symbol is also 3 times, and the total number of times of the middle symbol is 2 times. .. For the left symbol, the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the first light emitting effect, and the second light emitting effect are executed. Similarly, the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the first light emitting effect, and the second light emitting effect are executed for the right symbol. For the middle symbol, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 55, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the total number of times of the middle symbol is smaller than that of the left symbol (or the right symbol) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 55, in the present embodiment, the total number of times of the left symbol and the right symbol is the same regardless of the variation pattern, and the type of the effect to be executed is also the same. .. Regarding the second reach symbol light emission effect, there are feasible fluctuation patterns and non-executable fluctuation patterns. Therefore, the total number of times for the left symbol and the right symbol may differ depending on the type of variation pattern. The reach emission effect is not executed for the medium symbol. The hit light emission effect can be executed in the case of a big hit regardless of the game state, but cannot be executed in the case of a loss. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is twice regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the case of a loss, the light emission effect is not executed (that is, 0 times).

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect, and the hit light emitting effect in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect, and the hit light emitting effect in the probabilistic game state. In addition, in FIG. 56, the effect name is described under the total number of times of the above effect corresponding to the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped at the time of the reach light emission effect and the hit light emission effect. Further, FIG. 56 shows the case where the re-lottery effect is not performed during the hit notification, as in FIG. 55. Specifically, it will be described with reference to the column of "reach establishment-> battle production-> victory production-> fluctuation pattern corresponding to big hit". For example, in such a variation pattern for notifying a hit, the total number of times of the left symbol is 3 times, the total number of times of the right symbol is also 3 times, and the total number of times of the middle symbol is 2 times. For the left symbol (and the right symbol), the first reach symbol emission effect, the first emission effect, and the second emission effect are executed. For the middle symbol, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, the total number of times of the middle symbol is larger than that of the left symbol (or the right symbol) in any fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic gaming state as in the normal gaming state. few. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, the total number of times of the left symbol and the right symbol is the same regardless of the variation pattern, and the type of the effect to be executed is also the same. .. For the medium symbol, the fluctuation pattern in which the victory effect is executed is twice in the jackpot. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern in which the defeat effect is executed and the variation pattern in which the draw effect is lost among the jackpots, the light emission effect is not executed (that is, 0 times).

In both cases of FIGS. 55 and 56, in the case of a flow in which the second first light emission effect is executed after the re-lottery effect is performed during the hit notification (see FIG. 27), the variation pattern of each jackpot. Correspondingly, the total number of times is increased by one by the amount of the second first light emission effect.

Comparing FIGS. 55 and 56, in the present embodiment, the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect, and the hit light emitting effect are relative to each other in the normal gaming state than in the probabilistic gaming state. It can be executed many times. For each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the total number of times of the first reach symbol emission effect, the second reach symbol emission effect, and the hit light emission effect may be the same regardless of the gaming state, or the normal gaming state. The case of is may be less than the case of the probabilistic gaming state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect can be executed. In any gaming state (or in a predetermined gaming state), the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the second reach symbol light emitting effect cannot be executed, and the hit light emitting effect may be executed. As a result, all of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are twice (first light emission effect and second light emission effect) in the case of a big hit, and zero times in the case of loss. That is, regardless of whether it is a big hit or not, the total number of times of the above-mentioned effect (specifically, the number of times of only the hit light emission effect) is the same for the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. In such a configuration, the reach line effect may be feasible or infeasible.

In the normal game state, the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the non-reach light emission effect (see FIGS. 44 and 55) during one special symbol variation display. The total number of times of is the same for the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol is the smallest. In the probabilistic game state, the total number of times of the above-mentioned effects during one special symbol variation display increases in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol (see FIGS. 45 and 56). The total number of times of the above effects may be the same for each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol regardless of the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, a specific symbol indicating contents other than numbers may be displayed as a decorative symbol regardless of the gaming state. The specific symbol is, for example, a pseudo-ream symbol that is temporarily stopped to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed, a development symbol that is temporarily stopped to notify the effect of the development destination (for example, SP reach effect), or the like. In correspondence with the specific symbol, the non-reach medium light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect may not be executed. Therefore, the total number of times of the above-mentioned effect of the specific symbol is 0 regardless of the gaming state. In another embodiment, the above-mentioned effect may be executed corresponding to a specific symbol regardless of the gaming state, or in the case of a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the specific symbol is supported. The above effect may be executed. Further, while the above-mentioned effect is executed for a predetermined specific symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol), the above-mentioned effect may not be executed for another specific symbol (for example, a developed symbol).

In the present embodiment, the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect, and the hit light emitting effect correspond to the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped when the reach is established during one special symbol variation display. May be executed. On the other hand, during the variation display, the light emission effect may not be executed in response to the decorative symbol 55 that is not temporarily stopped when the reach is established. Therefore, the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped when the reach is established has a higher execution ratio of the light emission effect than the decorative symbol 55 that is not temporarily stopped when the reach is established.

In addition, regarding the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the second reach symbol light emitting effect, the number of executions in one special symbol variation display is larger in the normal gaming state than in the probabilistic gaming state. many. Regardless of the gaming state, the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emitting effect and the second reach symbol light emitting effect may be the same, or may be less in the normal gaming state than in the probabilistic gaming state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 44, 45, 55, and 56, light emission effects for each variation pattern (in this paragraph, non-reach medium light emission effect, first reach symbol light emission effect, second reach symbol light emission effect, first The total number of times of 1 light emission effect and 2 light emission effect) differs depending on the fluctuation pattern. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which a pseudo-ream is hit and notified by an infeasible N reach effect, a non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the left symbol, a non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol, and a first reach symbol light emission. There are five times, the production, the first light emission effect, and the second light emission effect. Further, for example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the pseudo-ream is infeasible and the SP reach effect developed from the N reach effect is used to notify the player, the light emission in the case of the variation pattern in which the pseudo-ream is hit and notified by the infeasible N reach effect. Since the second reach symbol light emitting effect is executed in addition to the effect, the total number of times is six. In this example, the total number of light emission effects is the same for the two variation patterns until the end of the N reach effect, and is different for the two variation patterns after the end of the N reach effect. In this way, by partially differentizing the total number of light emission effects according to the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming monotonous. The total number of light emission effects may differ from each other for each variation pattern. That is, when there are a plurality of fluctuation patterns capable of executing a predetermined effect, the total number of times differs for each variation pattern in the portion up to the end of the predetermined effect (for example, N reach effect) and the part after the end of the predetermined effect. You may.

It should be noted that the effect image 80 of a color suggesting high or low reliability may be displayed by the first reach symbol emission effect. Further, the effect image 82 of a color suggesting high or low reliability may be displayed by the second reach symbol emission effect. The colors of the effect images 80 and 82 may be determined, for example, by a random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130, or may be uniquely determined according to the type of reach effect. It may be uniquely determined according to the type of the decorative pattern 55 forming the reach.

(Chance eye emission production)
Next, the chance eye light emission effect when the chance eye stops will be described. Here, the chance eye does not indicate that it is a big hit in itself, but it suggests that it may be a big hit in the subsequent fluctuation of the current special symbol change or the change of the current special symbol. Is a decorative pattern (or a combination of specific decorative patterns). The chance eye that suggests the possibility of a big hit in the next and subsequent fluctuations is called the "look-ahead chance eye". The look-ahead chance eye is an effect performed based on the result of the preliminary determination, and is an effect over the variation of one or a plurality of special symbols.

In the present embodiment, the decorative patterns are classified into a plurality of types for each color suggesting high or low reliability. Specifically, the decorative symbols are blue symbols (even symbols of "2", "4", "6", "8") and green symbols ("1", "5", It is classified into an odd numbered symbol of "9") and a red symbol ("3", "7" symbol) which is red. The combination of three decorative symbols of the same classification constitutes a look-ahead chance. The pre-reading chance eyes composed of blue symbols are called "blue chance eyes", the pre-reading chance eyes composed of green symbols are called "green chance eyes", and the pre-reading chance eyes composed of red symbols are called "red chance eyes". For example, the combination of decorative patterns of "442" and "664" in order from the left is a blue chance. In addition, depending on the classification of each decorative symbol that constitutes the look-ahead chance eye, the reliability that becomes a big hit in the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol differs. Specifically, the reliability increases in the order of blue chance, green chance, and red chance. Further, when the look-ahead chance eye is displayed, the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect is performed for each decorative symbol 55.

Hereinafter, the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of an effect flow over fluctuations of a plurality of special symbols when a look-ahead chance eye is displayed. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG. 58.

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 (A), for example, when two rights for determining the first special symbol (hold icons 51a and 51b) are reserved, the time t0 during the change of the first special symbol In, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 11, the right of the first special symbol determination related to the winning is reserved (“holding icon 51c” is newly added). Here, the hold icons 51a, 51b, and 51c are referred to as "hold 1", "hold 2", and "hold 3", respectively. A preliminary judgment is made when the game ball according to the hold 3 is won. The right subject to this pre-judgment is referred to as a "look-ahead target".

Next, at time t1, the variation of the first special symbol ends, the variation effect ends, and the loss is notified (FIG. 58 (A)). Next, at time t2, the first special symbol determination related to the hold 1 is performed, and the three decorative symbols 55 start to change according to the start of the change of the first special symbol (FIG. 58 (B)). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the decorative symbol 55 (for example, the “4” symbol) temporarily stops in the left region (t3 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58 (C)). After that, the decorative symbol 55 (for example, the “2” symbol) temporarily stops in the right region (t4 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58 (D)). After that, the decorative symbol 55 (for example, the “4” symbol) temporarily stops in the middle region (t5 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58 (E)). As a result, three decorative symbols 55 (“442”) suggesting loss are displayed. The combination of these three decorative patterns 55 is a blue chance. While the decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in the left region, the right region, and the middle region in order, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed.

When the look-ahead chance eye is displayed, the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect is performed. That is, after the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, at the timing when the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, or immediately before the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle region, the three decorative symbols 55 are used. A look-ahead chance light emission effect is performed (t6 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58 (F)). Specifically, an effect image 91 for emphasizing each symbol is added to each of the three decorative symbols 55 so that the three decorative symbols 55 emit light. The effect image 91 may be an image displayed around each decorative symbol 55, may be an image superimposed in front of each decorative symbol 55, or may be an image displayed behind each decorative symbol 55. It may be an image displayed on. At this time, the three decorative symbols 55 are a character-bearing mode in which a character is added to a number symbol, and are a mode of "medium" size. It should be noted that while the look-ahead chance light emission effect for the three decorative symbols 55 is performed, each decorative symbol 55 may be momentarily enlarged and displayed more than each decorative symbol when the non-reach medium emission effect is performed. In this case, each decorative symbol 55 is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol 55 during the first light emission effect in the above-mentioned hit light emission effect. Further, each decorative symbol 55 in the pre-reading chance eye light emitting effect may be displayed larger than the decorative symbol in the second light emitting effect in the hit light emitting effect. It should be noted that the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even during the pre-reading chance eye emission effect.

The effect image 91 differs depending on the type of the decorative pattern 55 to be stopped. Specifically, when the blue chance eye (for example, "442") is displayed, the effect image 91 tinged with blue is displayed. Further, when the green chance eye (for example, "115") is displayed, the greenish effect image 91 is displayed. Further, when the red chance eye (for example, "337") is displayed, the reddish effect image 91 is displayed. The effect image 91 used for the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect is used for the effect image (effect image 61 used for the first light emission effect and the effect image 62 used for the second light emission effect) in the above-mentioned hit light emission effect, and for the non-reach medium light emission effect. It is an image different from the image used and the image used for the reach emission effect.

Further, when the look-ahead chance eye is displayed, a lamp light emission effect is performed in which the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 is made to emit light in a manner suggesting the look-ahead chance eye. The look-ahead chance light emission effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the lamp light emission effect performed by using the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 are linked. In this lamp emission effect, the effect means capable of emitting light emits light in a color suggesting high or low reliability (specifically, the same color as the color of the look-ahead chance eye). Specifically, when the blue chance eye is displayed, the lamp emission effect that the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits blue light at the timing when the look-ahead chance eye emission effect related to the blue chance eye is performed. Will be done. Further, when the green chance eye is displayed, the lamp light emission effect in which the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits green light is performed at the timing when the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect related to the green chance eye is performed. Further, when the red chance eye is displayed, the lamp light emission effect in which the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits red light is performed at the timing when the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect related to the red chance eye is performed.

That is, when the look-ahead chance eye is displayed, the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect and the lamp light emission effect related to the look-ahead chance eye are performed in conjunction with each other.

After the pre-reading chance eye light emission effect is executed, the variation of the first special symbol ends, and the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped (t7 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58 (G)). When the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped, the effect image 91 is not displayed, and the look-ahead chance eye emission effect is finished. Since the effect image 91 is displayed before the decorative symbol 55 is stopped, and the effect image 91 is not displayed when the decorative symbol 55 is stopped, the player can emphasize the look-ahead chance and the decoration at the time of the main stop. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the symbol 55 from being hindered. When the look-ahead chance light emission effect ends, the lamp light emission effect also ends. Even after the pre-reading chance eye light emission effect is completed, the corresponding lamp light emission effect may be continued. That is, even when the three decorative symbols are stopped (when the first special symbol is stopped), the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 may remain emitting light in blue. In this case, the lamp light emission effect related to the look-ahead chance may be completed at the start of the next fluctuation. At the timing when the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped (the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the three small symbols 56 are also stopped.

Next, the first special symbol determination according to the hold 2 is performed, the variation of the first special symbol starts, and the three decorative symbols 55 change (t8 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58 (H)). As for the hold 2, the left symbol is stopped (t9 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58 (I)), and the right symbol is stopped (t10 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59 (J)).

After that, the middle symbol stops (t11 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59 (K)). At this time, the three decorative symbols 55 may be "155" in order from the left. The combination of these three decorative patterns 55 is a green chance.

A look-ahead chance for the three decorative symbols 55 after the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops in the middle area, at the timing when the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops in the middle region, or just before the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops in the middle region. An eye emission effect is performed (t12 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59 (L)). Specifically, a greenish effect image 91 for emphasizing each symbol is added to each of the three decorative symbols 55 so that the three decorative symbols 55 emit green light. In addition, in conjunction with this look-ahead chance eye emission effect, a lamp emission effect corresponding to the green chance eye is also performed. Specifically, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits green light in response to the green look-ahead chance light emission effect. It should be noted that the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even during the look-ahead chance light emission effect related to the green chance eye.

Then, the variation of the first special symbol is completed, and the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped (t13 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59 (M)). Further, at the timing when the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped, the three small symbols 56 are also stopped. When the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped, the effect image 91 is not displayed, and the look-ahead chance eye emission effect is finished. After that, the fluctuation related to the hold 3 (variation related to the look-ahead target) is started (t14 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59 (N)). If a jackpot is determined in the special symbol determination at the start of this fluctuation, the jackpot is notified in this fluctuation. In this case, the above-mentioned hit light emission effect (first light emission effect, second light emission effect) is performed during the hit notification.

The pre-reading chance eye light emission effect is executed when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and the loss variation pattern (HP1 to HP3) is selected, and the reach variation pattern (RP1 to RP4) is selected. If not executed.

When the hit notification is performed in the fluctuation related to the look-ahead target, the period (decoration) from the start (or end) of the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and / or the second light emission effect) to the main stop of the decorative symbol 55. The swing period of the symbol 55 is the period from the start (or end) of the pre-reading chance eye light emission effect performed in the fluctuation before the fluctuation related to the look-ahead target to the main stop of the decorative symbol 55 (the swing of the decorative symbol 55). Dynamic period: longer than, for example, the period from time points t6 to t7, the period from time points t12 to t13). The relationship between these swing periods may be reversed or may be the same. That is, when the hit notification is performed in the fluctuation related to the look-ahead target, the period from the start (or end) of the hit light emission effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol 55 (the swing period of the decorative symbol 55) is related to the look-ahead target. It may be shorter or the same as the period from the start (or end) of the look-ahead chance eye emission effect performed in the variation before the variation to the main stop of the decorative symbol 55.

Further, when the hit notification is performed in the fluctuation related to the look-ahead target, the execution time of the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and / or the second light emission effect) is performed in the change before the change related to the look-ahead target. While the execution time of the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect is shorter, the reliability of the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and / or the second light emission effect) is the most reliable look-ahead chance eye light emission effect. It is higher than the reliability of (the look-ahead chance eye emission effect related to the red chance eye). The relationship between these execution periods may be reversed or the same. That is, when the hit notification is performed in the fluctuation related to the look-ahead target, the execution time of the hit light emission effect may be longer than the execution time of the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect performed in the change before the change related to the look-ahead target. However, it may be the same.

In addition, there are multiple modes with different reliability for the look-ahead chance eye emission effect (look-ahead chance eye light emission effect related to the blue chance eye, look-ahead chance eye light emission effect related to the green chance eye, look-ahead chance eye light emission effect related to the red chance eye). However, there may be only one mode of the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and / or second light emission effect). Further, the look-ahead chance light emission effect has a plurality of modes having different reliability, and the hit light emission effect may also have a plurality of modes (same reliability).

Further, in the above-mentioned look-ahead chance eye, the color of each decorative symbol constituting the look-ahead chance eye corresponds (same) to the color related to the look-ahead chance eye emission effect, but each decorative symbol is not classified by color. You may. In this case, the mode of the look-ahead chance eye emission effect may be changed depending on the color of the effect image added to each decorative pattern, and the reliability may be suggested by the color. For example, when the "2" symbol and the "4" symbol are white, when the chance eye of "442" is displayed, a blue or green effect image is displayed around each decorative symbol to create a blue color. You may perform a greenish look-ahead chance eye emission effect.

In addition, the look-ahead chance eye emission effect is not limited to the mode in which the effect image is displayed around each decorative pattern, and the whole or part of the background image is a predetermined color (blue, green, red, etc.) suggesting reliability. It may be an embodiment that changes to.

In the above, when the look-ahead chance is displayed, the decorative symbols in the left region, the right region, and the middle region are stopped in order, but the order in which the decorative symbols are stopped is not limited to this. Further, even when the decorative symbols in the left region, the right region, and the middle region are stopped at the same time, the look-ahead chance eye may be temporarily stopped and the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect may be performed.

Further, in the above, the look-ahead chance eyes are configured by the three decorative symbols 55, but the look-ahead chance eyes may be formed by one or two decorative symbols 55. Further, the look-ahead chance eye may be configured by using not only numbers but also symbols with letters. Further, in the above, the decorative symbols constituting the look-ahead chance eyes are the decorative symbols of the same classification, but any decorative symbol may be used to display the look-ahead chance eyes. In this case, regardless of the type of the decorative symbol 55 to be stopped, when the look-ahead chance eye emission effect (effect image 91) is executed, the look-ahead chance eye is obtained.

Further, in the above, the case where the look-ahead chance eye is displayed in the normal gaming state has been described, but the look-ahead chance eye may be displayed also in the probabilistic gaming state and / or the time-saving gaming state.

As described above, even when the look-ahead chance eye based on the result of the preliminary determination is displayed, the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect for the decorative symbol 55 is performed. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectations of the player and improve the interest of the player.

Next, we will explain the chances that suggest the possibility of a big hit in the current fluctuation of special symbols. The chance eye that suggests the possibility of a big hit in the current fluctuation of the special symbol is called the "relevant chance eye".

The chance eye is an effect of temporarily stopping a specific combination of decorative symbols or a specific symbol (specific image) in one change of the special symbol. For example, the chance eye may be a specific combination of three decorative symbols 55 with numbers (eg, "123", "456", etc.). Further, the chance eye may be an effect in which one specific symbol (specific image) is displayed. For example, the specific symbol (specific image) may be an image written as "NEXT" or "continuation" suggesting a pseudo-variation effect (pseudo-ream).

Even when the chance eye is displayed, a light emission effect (hereinafter, referred to as “the chance eye light emission effect”) is performed on the decorative pattern (image) constituting the chance eye. In the following, as the chance eye, the light emission effect of the chance eye when the image suggesting the pseudo-ream is stopped will be described. Here, the light emission effect for a pattern (image) suggesting a pseudo-ream may be referred to as a "pseudo-ream light emission effect".

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect when a NEXT symbol suggesting a pseudo-ream is displayed in a normal gaming state. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variation effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when the variation of the special symbol starts, the variation of the three decorative symbols 55 starts (FIG. 61 (A)). When a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops in the left region (FIG. 61 (B)), and then the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops in the right region (FIG. 61 (C)). Next, the "NEXT" symbol suggesting a pseudo-ream moves from the top to the bottom in the middle region, and a pseudo-ream effect is performed in which the pseudo-ream is expected to be performed (FIG. 61 (D)). Then, the "NEXT" symbol suggesting that the pseudo-ream is performed is temporarily stopped in the middle region, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed (FIG. 61 (E)).

For example, in the pseudo-ream effect, the image written as "NEXT" suggesting the pseudo-ream and the decorative symbol 55 on which the numbers are written are variablely displayed in the middle area which is the display area of the decorative symbol 55. The effect of whether or not the image of is temporarily stopped in the middle area and displayed is performed. In this case, the image written as "NEXT" may be displayed by superimposing it on the decorative symbol 55 of the numbers displayed in the middle area. Alternatively, in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect, the image written as "NEXT" is displayed semi-transparently or moved in the display area of the three decorative symbols 55 including the left area, the middle area, and the right area. You may. Then, when the image written as "NEXT" is displayed in three display areas (when the translucent image is changed to a clear image or when the image that has been moved and displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed), it is pseudo. It is notified that the ream will be performed.

At this time, a pseudo continuous light emission effect in which the "NEXT" symbol emits light is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the effect image 92 is displayed around the "NEXT" symbol, and the "NEXT" symbol is highlighted. The effect image 92 may be superimposed and displayed in front of or behind the "NEXT" symbol. The effect image 92 is a light emitting effect (reach light emitting) for the effect images 61 and 62 in the above-mentioned hit light emitting effect, the effect image 91 used for the chance eye light emitting effect related to the look-ahead chance eye, and other decorative symbols performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It is an image different from the effect image used for the effect (light emission effect during non-reach). It should be noted that the effect image 92 of a color suggesting high or low reliability (for example, any of blue, green, red, and zebra suggesting the possibility of a big hit, or a rainbow color suggesting a big hit) by the pseudo-continuous light emission effect. May be displayed. The color of the effect image 92 may be uniquely determined, for example, according to the number of pseudo-reams, or may be determined by the effect control unit 130 by a random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination.

Further, as shown in the figure, the left and right decorative symbols 55 that have been displayed until immediately before may be hidden, and an image suggesting that pseudo-ream is performed may be displayed on the entire screen. During the pseudo-continuous light emission effect, the three decorative symbols 55 may be temporarily stopped by superimposing on the back side of the "NEXT" symbol, or may be changed at high speed (or at low speed). In addition, a lamp light emission effect is also performed in conjunction with this pseudo continuous light emission effect. The lamp light emission effect corresponding to this pseudo continuous light emission effect is the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the above-mentioned hit light emission effect, the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the look-ahead chance eye, the lamp light emission corresponding to the reach light emission effect, and the non-reach medium light emission effect. The effect is different from the corresponding lamp emission. In the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous light emission effect, the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light in a color corresponding to the pseudo-continuous light emission effect suggesting the pseudo-ream. It should be noted that, depending on the lamp emission effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous emission effect, any of the colors suggesting high or low reliability (for example, blue, green, red, zebra suggesting the possibility of a big hit, or the rainbow suggesting a big hit). The board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 may emit light in color). This color may be uniquely determined in response to the pseudo-continuous light emission effect, or may be determined by a random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130.

If the pseudo-ream is not performed, the "NEXT" symbol is not temporarily stopped (the image written as "NEXT" is not temporarily stopped and displayed) as a result of the pseudo-ream effect, and the above-mentioned pseudo-ream light emission effect is performed. Is not done either.

After the image suggesting that the pseudo-ream is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 re-variate (FIG. 61 (F)). At this time, for example, the pseudo-number image 93 is displayed in the upper left area of the screen. The pseudo-number image 93 is an image showing the number of pseudo-reams, and in the case of the first revariation (“pseudo 2”), an image written as “× 2” is displayed. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first re-variation, the "NEXT" symbol may be temporarily stopped (FIG. 61 (G)). As a result, it is notified that the second revariation (“pseudo 3”) is performed. Also at this time, the effect image 92 is displayed around the "NEXT" symbol.

Then, the second revariation (“pseudo 3”) is performed, and the pseudo number image 93 changes to “× 3” (FIG. 61 (H)). After that, the decorative symbols 55 of the same type are temporarily stopped on the left and right, the reach is established (FIG. 61 (I)), and the reach effect is performed. Since the production proceeds in the same manner as described above, the following description will be omitted.

Here, the "NEXT" symbol, which suggests a pseudo-ream, is not a symbol with a number, and is not a symbol used at the time of hit notification, unlike the "1" symbol to the "9" symbol. However, the "NEXT" symbol is an image that is variablely displayed in the region where the decorative symbol 55 fluctuates, like the decorative symbol 55 with numbers, and is temporarily stopped from the variable display state. This is to make the player expect (guess) the result of the special symbol determination. Therefore, the "NEXT" symbol can be regarded as a kind of decorative symbol 55. It can be said that the pseudo-continuous light emission effect performed with the temporary stop of the "NEXT" symbol is a light emission effect for the decorative symbol. The "NEXT" symbol may be an image different from the decorative symbol.

In addition, in FIG. 61, an example in which an image suggesting a pseudo-ream is displayed after the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in the left region and the right region, but the image suggesting the pseudo-ream is described in the left region, the right region, and the right region. The decorative symbol 55 may be displayed after the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in at least one of the middle regions.

Further, even if the decorative symbol 55 is not temporarily stopped in any of the left region, the right region, and the middle region, an image suggesting a pseudo-ream may be displayed. In this case, after the image suggesting the pseudo-ream is displayed (temporarily stopped), the number of pseudo-reams indicated by the pseudo-number image 93 increases by "1". That is, it may be suggested that the pseudo-ream is performed even if none of the three decorative symbols 55 is temporarily stopped, and the current fluctuation is continued.

Further, although the effect shown in FIG. 61 is to be performed in the normal gaming state, the pseudo-ream and pseudo-ream light emission effects may be performed in the probabilistic game state and / or the time-saving game state.

Further, in FIG. 61, the case where the pseudo-ream is performed has been described, but a combination of specific decorative symbols suggesting that it develops into a specific effect (for example, "1", "2", and "3" symbols. Similarly, when the chance eye composed of the order order or the reach loss eye is displayed, the chance eye light emitting effect may be performed for each decorative symbol according to the chance eye. For example, the specific effect may be an effect that causes the player to expect the player to stop aligning the "7" symbols. The combination of specific decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped during the pre-reach effect, or may be temporarily stopped after the reach is established.

Also, a decorative pattern that suggests a specific effect, for example, a development pattern that suggests that it will develop into a reach effect (for example, an image that says "development"), and that it is relatively reliable (around 10%). The suggestion chance symbol (for example, the image written as "chance") and the intense heat symbol suggesting that the reliability is 50% or more (for example, the image written as "intense heat") are temporarily stopped. May be good. Similar to the "NEXT" symbol, these images are also images that are variablely displayed in the area where the decorative symbol 55 fluctuates, and by temporarily stopping from the variable display state, the player can determine the special symbol. The result is expected (guessed). Therefore, these images can also be regarded as a kind of decorative pattern. Even when these images (decorative symbols) are temporarily stopped, a light emitting effect may be performed on the temporarily stopped images.

Further, in the above, when the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped, a light emitting effect is performed on the decorative symbol. For example, when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in the form of a big hit, a hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and / or second light emission effect) is performed before the decorative symbol 55 is finally stopped. Further, when the pre-reading chance eye is displayed by using the decorative symbol 55, the pre-reading chance eye light emission effect is performed even when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a lost manner and before the decorative symbol 55 is actually stopped. rice field. In the present embodiment, based on the result of the special symbol determination or the preliminary determination, the light emission effect (light emission effect at the start) may be performed on the decorative symbol 55 even at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 55. The start light emission effect may be executed in a variation in which the hit light emission effect is performed, in a variation in which the hit light emission effect is not performed, or in a variation in which the look-ahead chance eye is displayed. Alternatively, it may be executed in a fluctuation in which the look-ahead chance eye is not displayed. The start light emission effect is different from the hit light emission effect and the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, and is a color that suggests high or low reliability (for example, blue, green, red, or zebra that suggests the possibility of a big hit). (Or, a rainbow color that suggests a big hit) The decorative pattern 55 emits light. For example, in the light emission effect at the start, when the three decorative symbols 55 start to fluctuate, a red effect image may be displayed for each of the three decorative symbols 55. The start light emission effect is an effect that suggests the reliability in the change of the current special symbol, and the emission color of the decorative symbol 55 in the start light emission effect may suggest the reliability in the change. The start light emission effect and the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect have a plurality of effect modes (red, green, etc.), whereas the hit light emission effect may have one effect mode.

In the variation in which the hit light emission effect is performed, the light emission effect at the start may be easily performed at the start of the variation. That is, when the start light emission effect is executed immediately after the special symbol changes start, the hit light emission effect may be more easily performed in the change of the special symbol than in the case where the start light emission effect is not executed. Further, when the hit light emission effect is performed in the fluctuation, the start light emission effect may be more easily executed at the start of the fluctuation than in the case where the look-ahead chance light emission effect is performed in the fluctuation. Further, when the light emission effect at the start is executed, the look-ahead chance light emission effect may be performed in the fluctuation.

As described above, even when the chance eye is displayed based on the result of the special symbol determination, the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect for the decorative symbol 55 is performed. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectations of the player and improve the interest of the player.

Comparing the sizes of each image related to each of the above light emission effects in the present embodiment, the effect image 82, the effect image 62, the effect image 64, the non-reach light emission effect image 70, the effect image 91, the effect image 80, and the effect image 92 are compared. , Effect image 60, effect image 63, and effect image 61 in that order. The reach line image 81 is longer in the lateral direction (longitudinal direction) than any of the above images. The vertical direction (short direction) of the reach line image 81 is at least shorter than the effect images 60, 61, 63, 80, and at least longer than the effect image 82.

In the present embodiment, when the display positions of the images related to the above light emission effects are compared with respect to the vertical direction (short direction) of the liquid crystal screen 5, the following relationship may be obtained. Specifically, for example, the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, 80 are located above the upper ends of the effect images 62, 64 and the upper ends of the reach line image 81. Further, the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, 80 may be located above the upper end of the effect image 80, or may be the same. Further, for example, the effect image 82 is located above the reach line image 81. Further, for example, the upper end of the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 and the upper ends of the effect images 91 and 92 may be located below or above the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, 80. It may be located.

For each image (specifically, effect images 60 to 64, 70, 80, 82, 91, 92, and reach line image 81) related to each of the above light emission effects, the entire image may be erased at once, or a portion thereof. The time until it is erased may be different. For example, each of the above images is scattered so as to radiate from the central portion of the image, and the contour portion may remain in various places on the liquid crystal screen 5 even after the central portion disappears (for example, the decorative pattern 55). It may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of.). Further, each of the above images may be erased while the shape of the contour changes discontinuously (note that a part may be interrupted) so that the contour cannot be clearly represented. Further, each of the above images may be erased after the contour cannot be clearly expressed due to the change in transmittance from the vicinity of the contour toward the contour, for example.

Next, the swing period of the decorative symbol 55 after the pre-reading chance eye light emission effect, reach light emission effect, and hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and / or second light emission effect) are executed will be described.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a comparison of swing periods of the decorative symbol 55 when the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, reach light emission effect, and hit light emission effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 62 (A), when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, after the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect is executed, until the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped, the three decorative symbols 55 are Swing. Specifically, when the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation stop command from the game control unit 100, the effect control unit 130 actually stops the three decorative symbols 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5. After that, when the fluctuation start command is received at the start of the fluctuation of the next special symbol, the effect control unit 130 starts the fluctuation of the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62B, when the reach effect is performed, the decorative symbol 55 swings for a predetermined period after the reach light emission effect is performed according to the establishment of the reach. Specifically, during the reach effect, the left and right decorative symbols 55 swing, and the decorative symbol 55 in the middle region fluctuates at high speed. Then, as a result of the reach effect, it is notified whether or not it is a big hit, and after the three decorative symbols 55 swing for a predetermined period, the three decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped in response to the fluctuation stop command from the game control unit 100. do. After that, when the fluctuation start command is received at the start of the fluctuation of the next special symbol, the effect control unit 130 starts the fluctuation of the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), when the hit notification is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 swing after the hit light emission effect is performed, and respond to the fluctuation stop command from the game control unit 100. The three decorative symbols 55 are stopped. After that, the opening command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. The effect control unit 130 executes an opening effect based on the opening command, and further receives a round start command from the game control unit 100 to execute a jackpot effect. Next, the effect control unit 130 receives an ending command from the game control unit 100 at the end of the jackpot game, and performs an ending effect. Then, the effect control unit 130 receives a variation start command based on the next special symbol determination from the game control unit 100, executes a variation effect to change the decorative symbol 55 based on the variation start command, and responds to the variation. The variable stop command is received from the game control unit 100 to stop the decorative symbol 55.

When the effect control unit 130 normally receives the command from the game control unit 100, the swing period FT1 of the decorative symbol 55 after the pre-reading chance eye light emission effect starts (or ends) and the reach light emission effect starts (or ends). Comparing the swing period FT2 of the decorative symbol 55 after the end) and the swing period FT3 of the decorative symbol 55 after the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect or second light emission effect) has started (or ended). , FT1 <FT3 <FT2. These relationships may be FT3 <FT1 <FT2.

On the other hand, if the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive the command from the game control unit 100, the relationship between the swing periods may change.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a comparison of swing periods of decorative symbols when the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive a command from the game control unit 100.

As shown in FIG. 63A, when the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive a command (variation stop command or next fluctuation start command) from the game control unit 100 in the variation in which the look-ahead chance eye is executed. , The swing period FT1 becomes FT1'. Specifically, if the fluctuation stop command is not received after the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 are the next command from the game control unit 100 (the fluctuation stop command related to the next fluctuation). ) Is received, it swings.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive the command (variation stop command or the next variation start command) from the game control unit 100 in the variation in which the reach effect is executed. In this case, the swing period FT2 becomes FT2'. Specifically, if the variation stop command is not received after the reach light emission effect is executed, the decorative symbol 55 receives the next command (variation stop command related to the next variation) from the game control unit 100. Swing until.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive the command (variation stop command or next fluctuation start command) from the game control unit 100 in the variation in which the hit notification is executed. In this case, the swing period FT3 becomes FT3'. Specifically, if the fluctuation stop command is not received after the hit light emission effect is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 receive the next command (next command) from the game control unit 100 after the jackpot game is performed. It swings until it receives the fluctuation stop command) related to the fluctuation.

The relationship between the lengths of the swing periods FT1', FT2', and FT3'is FT1'<FT2'<FT3'.

That is, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a game control unit 100 that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control unit 130 that controls the effect based on the progress of the game by the game control unit 100. The game control unit 100 variablely displays predetermined identification information based on the special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the start condition and the determination result by the special game determination means. The identification information display means for displaying the stop after the elapse of the predetermined variation time, the variation start command for indicating the start of the variation display of the predetermined identification information, and the variation stop command for indicating the variation stop of the predetermined identification display are produced. It has a command transmission means that can be transmitted to the control means. The effect control unit 130 has a command receiving means capable of receiving a command transmitted from the command transmitting means, and can display a decorative symbol image and a predetermined game effect due to a change in the identification information. The predetermined game effect includes a reach effect that makes the special game expected to be performed by putting the decorative symbol image in the reach state, and a reach light emitting effect for the decorative symbol image that is executed when the reach state is established. , The hit light emitting effect for the decorative symbol image, which is executed when the reach effect is completed and the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the execution of the special game. The first swing time (FT2) of the decorative symbol from the execution of the reach light emission effect to the reception of a predetermined command (a variable stop command of the fluctuation in which the reach light emission effect is executed) by the command receiving means is , The second swing time (FT3) of the decorative symbol from the execution of the hit light emission effect to the reception of the predetermined command (the fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation in which the hit light emission effect is executed) by the command receiving means. Longer than. Further, after the reach light emission effect is executed, the next predetermined command (of the fluctuation stop command) without receiving the predetermined command (variation stop command of the fluctuation in which the reach light emission effect is executed) is not received by the command receiving means. The third swing time (FT2') of the decorative symbol until the command receiving means receives the next fluctuation stop command) is a predetermined command (the hit light emission effect is executed) after the hit light emission effect is executed. The first of the decorative symbols until the command receiving means receives the next predetermined command (the next variable stop command of the variable stop command) without receiving the variable stop command of the changed fluctuation). 4 It is shorter than the swing time (FT3').

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a game control unit 100 that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control unit 130 that controls the effect based on the progress of the game by the game control unit 100. The game control unit 100 variablely displays predetermined identification information based on the special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the start condition and the determination result by the special game determination means. The identification information display means for displaying the stop after the elapse of the predetermined variation time, the variation start command for indicating the start of the variation display of the predetermined identification information, and the variation stop command for indicating the variation stop of the predetermined identification display are produced. It has a command transmission means that can be transmitted to the control means. The effect control unit 130 has a command receiving means capable of receiving a command transmitted from the command transmitting means, and can display a decorative symbol image and a predetermined game effect due to a change in the identification information. In the predetermined game effect, by displaying the decorative symbol image in a predetermined mode (a mode of the look-ahead chance eye), it is expected that the special game will be performed based on the determination result by the special game determination means later. In the pre-judgment effect (pre-reading chance eye), the pre-reading chance eye light emitting effect for the decorative symbol image executed in association with the pre-determination effect, and the determination by the special game determination means after the pre-determination effect is completed. Includes a hit light emission effect on the decorative symbol image, which is executed when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the execution of the special game when it is determined to perform the special game. The fifth swing time of the decorative symbol from the execution of the pre-reading chance eye light emitting effect to the reception of a predetermined command (the fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation in which the pre-reading chance eye light emitting effect is executed) by the command receiving means. (FT1) is the second swing of the decorative symbol from the execution of the hit light emission effect to the reception of a predetermined command (the fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation in which the hit light emission effect is executed) by the command receiving means. Shorter (or longer) than time (FT3). Further, after the pre-reading chance eye light emitting effect is executed, the next predetermined command (the said command) is not received by the command receiving means without receiving a predetermined command (a fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation in which the pre-reading chance eye light emitting effect is executed). The sixth swing time (FT1') of the decorative symbol until the command receiving means receives the next variable stop command of the variable stop command) is a predetermined command (the hit) after the hit light emission effect is executed. The command receiving means receives the next predetermined command (the next variable stop command of the variable stop command) without receiving the variable stop command of the fluctuation in which the light emission effect is executed. It is shorter than the fourth swing time (FT3') of the decorative symbol.

It should be noted that a zone effect that causes the player to expect a big hit may be executed over the variable display of one or a plurality of special symbols. The zone effect is an effect that suggests whether or not there is a big hit in the right of the special symbol determination currently reserved (change of the special symbol related to the suspension). For example, if a game ball wins a prize at the starting opening while the special symbol is changing, the right to determine the special symbol is reserved, and the right is determined whether it is a big hit or not (preliminary determination). The zone effect is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination. For example, in the zone effect, an effect image of a color suggesting high or low reliability is displayed on the peripheral edge of the liquid crystal screen 5, or a band-shaped image displaying the name of the zone effect is displayed on the left and right ends of the liquid crystal screen 5. .. In the zone effect, even if the background image is switched to a special image or a predetermined character (for example, character A) appears, the player can recognize that the zone effect is being executed. good.

When the effect image related to the zone effect is displayed, the non-reach medium light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect may be executed. The effect image related to the zone effect may be applied to the effect image related to each of the above light emission effects. Therefore, the visibility of the effect image related to each of the above light emission effects may be deteriorated by the effect image related to the zone effect.

On the other hand, even when the effect image related to the zone effect is displayed, at least the small symbol 56, the reserved digit 52, and the fourth symbol 57, 59 are not covered with the effect image, and the small symbol 56, the reserved digit 52, and the reserved digit 52 are displayed. The fourth symbols 57 and 59 are neither obscured nor deteriorated in visibility.

In this embodiment, the zone effect is not executed during the execution of the hit light emission effect. When the hit light emission effect is executed, the zone effect ends before the hit light emission effect starts (for example, at the start of the determined effect).

In the present embodiment, the zone effect includes a zone effect A and a zone effect B. The fact that the zone effect A is performed indicates that the expectation of a big hit is "medium" (for example, 10% to 20%) in the subsequent fluctuations of the special symbol. For example, the zone effect A may be executed when it is determined as a big hit in the preliminary determination, but the variation pattern for loss (for example, SP reach effect) in which the variation time of the special symbol is slightly longer in the preliminary determination is supported. It is an effect that is easy to be executed when the fluctuation pattern) is determined.

Zone production B is a production with a higher degree of expectation than zone production A. For example, the zone effect B is an effect that is easily executed when a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time of the special symbol (for example, a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect) is determined in the preliminary determination. The zone effect B is more likely to be executed in response to a big hit than when the result of the preliminary determination is a loss. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fact that the zone effect B is performed indicates that the degree of expectation of a big hit is "high" (for example, 40% to 50%) in the subsequent fluctuations of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the player may be promoted to the zone effect B via the zone effect A. For example, as an effect suggesting promotion to zone effect B during execution of zone effect A, for example, the characters "This is unpleasant" may be displayed in full screen. Zone effect B may be started with the erasure of this character.

The zone effect may be an effect that is performed based on the result of the special symbol determination and suggests the result of the special symbol determination. In this case, the zone effect starts during the variable display of the special symbol and ends during the variable display of the special symbol.

[Timer interrupt processing by the effect control unit 130]
Next, the details of the effect control based on various commands from the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 69.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the effect control unit 130. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 131 of the effect control unit 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 64 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interruption. A part or all of the processes shown in FIGS. 64 to 69 may be executed by any of the effect control unit 130, the image / sound control unit 140, and the lamp control unit 150.

The effect control unit 130 (CPU 131) first executes a command reception process (step S1001). The command reception process in step S1001 is a process for controlling the effect based on various commands from the game control unit 100. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 receives a command from the game control unit 100, determines the content of the effect according to the received command, and applies the determined effect to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Generates a command to be executed and sets it in RAM 133. The details of the command reception process in step S1001 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 48.

Following step S1001, the effect control unit 130 performs a command transmission process of transmitting each command set in the RAM 133 to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step S1002). For example, a command for starting the variation effect set in the process of step S1001 and a command for ending the variation effect are transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the image / sound control unit 140 performs effects such as image display and sound output, and the lamp control unit 150 controls the operation of the movable accessory 7, the lighting of the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, the effect buttons 26, and the like. It will be done.

Following the process of step S1002, the effect control unit 130 executes the transfer process (step S1003). Specifically, when the effect control unit 130 receives a control command from the image / sound control unit 140, the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the lamp control unit 150. For example, the control commands from the image / sound control unit 140 include a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the effect button 26, and a control command for executing each lamp emission effect described above. And so on. Further, when the effect control unit 130 receives a control command from the lamp control unit 150, the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the image / sound control unit 140. The control command from the lamp control unit 150 includes a control command indicating that the effect button 26 has been operated. By transmitting and receiving control commands via the effect control unit 130 between the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the movable accessory 7 is synchronized with the image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. An image is displayed in response to an operation or an operation on the effect button 26, and a lamp emission effect in which the panel lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37 emits light is executed.

[Command reception processing by the effect control unit 130]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed by the effect control unit 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the command reception process in step S1001 of FIG.

First, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the hold command transmitted from the game control unit 100 has been received (step S1301). When it is determined that the hold command has been received (step S1301: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the hold command process (step S1302). The details of the pending command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1302 is executed, or when it is determined that the hold command has not been received (step S1301: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the variation start command has been received (step S1303). ).

When the variation start command is received (step S1303: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the variation start command process (step S1304). Specifically, in step S1304, the effect control unit 130 determines the content of the variation effect according to the variation of the special symbol based on the received variation start command, and causes the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to determine the content of the variation effect. Generate a command to execute the fluctuation effect. The command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the command transmission process of step S1002, and the variation effect is executed. The details of the fluctuation start command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1304 is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (step S1303: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received (step). S1305).

When the variable stop command is received (step S1305: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the variable stop command process (step S1306). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 transmits a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, for example, the decorative symbol 51 that is variablely displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) on the liquid crystal screen 5 is finally stopped, and the variable effect is completed.

When the process of step S1306 is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S1305: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the opening command has been received (step S1307). ).

When the opening command is received (step S1307: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the opening process (step S1308). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines the opening effect based on the opening command transmitted when the jackpot is won, and causes the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening effect.

When the process of step S1308 is executed, or when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (step S1307: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the ending command has been received (step S1309). ..

When the ending command is received (step S1309: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the ending process (step S1310). In the ending process, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed.

When the process of step S1310 is executed, or when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (step S1309: NO), the effect control unit 130 ends the process shown in FIG. 48.

[Hold command processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command process in step 1302 of FIG. 65. First, the effect control unit 130 updates the reserved number of special symbol determination stored in the RAM 133 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S1320). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to the value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. If this is the case, the number of pending second special symbol determinations is updated to the value obtained by adding "1".

Next, the effect control unit 130 acquires the prior determination information included in the received hold command (step S1321).

Next, the effect control unit 130 determines by lottery whether or not to perform the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination information (step S1322). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to change the hold icon 51 to a display mode having a higher expectation than usual, and a scenario of the change, as a preliminary determination effect. For example, it is determined whether or not the hold icon 51 related to the winning of the starting port this time is changed to a mode with high expectation at the time of winning, and whether or not it is changed in the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol.

Further, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to display the pre-reading chance eye as a pre-determination effect. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 executes an effect of displaying the look-ahead chance eye (pre-reading chance eye effect) in the change before the change of the special symbol related to the current prize (change of the target of the preliminary determination). Decide whether or not to do so, and the period (the number of fluctuations to display the look-ahead chance). Here, a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which reach effect is performed) is selected in the target variation of the pre-determination, and a predetermined variation pattern (for example, reach effect is performed) in the variation before the target variation. If the variation pattern) is not selected, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance eye effect by a predetermined lottery.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 130 determines the winning sound when displaying the hold icon 51 related to the winning to the starting port this time (step S1323). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines different winning sounds according to the color of the hold icon 51 determined in step S1322.

Next, the effect control unit 130 sets a hold increase command based on the processing results of steps S1322 and S1323 (step S1324). By transmitting this hold increase command to the image / sound control unit 140, the hold icon 51 related to the winning of the start port this time is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in the display mode determined in step S1322, and the step. The winning sound determined in S1323 is output. Further, in response to this hold increase command, the number indicated by the hold number 52 is increased by "1".

[Variation start command processing by the effect control unit 130]
FIG. 67 is a detailed flowchart of the variation start command process in step 1304 of FIG.

The effect control unit 130 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (step S1340). This fluctuation start command includes information on a symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process (whether or not it is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol, etc.), whether the information on this symbol is related to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol. It includes information on a winning start opening indicating whether or not it is related to determination, information on a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The effect control unit 130 can specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the fluctuation start command. That is, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit and the fluctuation pattern (variation time). Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

When the variation start command is analyzed, the effect control unit 130 determines an effect pattern indicating the content of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S1341). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach effect, the presence / absence of the above-mentioned various light emission effects, and the mode thereof, based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Etc. are decided. Further, when the effect control unit 130 determines in step S1322 that the look-ahead chance eye effect is to be executed as the pre-determination effect, the effect control unit 130 determines the mode of the look-ahead chance eye and the mode of the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform various advance notice effects and the like when the variable effect according to the effect pattern determined in the process of step S1341 is performed by performing a lottery using the effect random numbers. , The content of the advance notice production and the like is determined (step S1342).

Next, the effect control unit 130 sets the RAM 133 with a variation effect start command instructing execution of the variation effect according to the effect pattern determined in the processes of steps S1341 and S1342 (step S1343). This variation effect start command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the determined variation effect is executed by the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

Following the process of step S1343, the effect control unit 130 subtracts "1" from the number of holds stored in the RAM 133 (step S1344).

[Timer interrupt processing by the image / sound control unit 140]
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the image / sound control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the image / sound control unit 140. The image / sound control unit 140 repeats a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 68 at regular time intervals (for example, 1/60 second) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Run.

First, the image / sound control unit 140 (CPU 141) determines whether or not a variable effect start command has been received from the effect control unit 130 (step S1401). Upon receiving the variation effect start command, the image / sound control unit 140 starts the variation effect according to the content of the variation effect included in the variation effect start command (step S1402). As a result, the decorative symbol 55 starts to fluctuate on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the fluctuating effect is executed. Further, an animation in which each hold icon 51 is moved to the right side is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the number indicated by the hold number 52 is reduced by "1".

When the process of step S1402 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S1401, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not an operation command corresponding to the operation for the effect button 26 has been received (step S1403). .. When the operation command is received (step S1403: YES), the image / sound control unit 140 controls the variation effect according to the operation command (step S1404). The image / sound control unit 140 sets an effective period during which the operation on the effect button 26 is effective during the variation effect. For example, the valid period is set in the determined effect immediately before the hit notification. When the operation command is received during the valid period, the image / sound control unit 140 executes an effect according to the operation. For example, in the case of executing the symbol alignment effect or the accessory operation effect in response to the operation of the effect button 26 in the determination effect, the image / sound control unit 140 displays an image related to the symbol alignment effect or the accessory operation effect according to the operation on the liquid crystal display. Display on screen 5.

When the process of step S1404 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step S1403, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not it is the timing to execute the lamp emission effect (step S1405). When it is the timing to execute the lamp light emission effect (step S1405: YES), the image / sound control unit 140 transmits a control command related to the lamp light emission effect to the effect control unit 130 (step S1406). This control command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150 via the effect control unit 130.

When the process of step S1406 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step S1405, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not the variation effect end command has been received (step S1407). When the variation effect end command is received (step S1407: YES), the image / sound control unit 140 ends the variation effect (step S1408). Specifically, the image / sound control unit 140 actually stops the decorative symbol 51 swinging on the liquid crystal screen 5.

In addition to the processing shown in FIG. 68, the image / sound control unit 140 performs processing related to the hold command, processing related to the opening effect, processing related to the jackpot game effect during the jackpot game, processing related to the ending effect, and the like. As a result, the hold icon 51 is displayed, the opening effect is executed, the jackpot game effect is executed, and the ending effect is executed.

[Ramp control processing by the lamp control unit 150]
Next, the lamp control process performed by the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of the lamp control process by the lamp control unit 150.

As shown in FIG. 69, the lamp control unit 150 determines whether or not an operation on the effect button 26 is detected (step S1501). When the operation for the effect button 26 is detected (step S1501: YES), the lamp control unit 150 transmits an operation command to the effect control unit 130 (step S1502). This operation command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 via the effect control unit 130.

When the step S1502 is executed or when it is determined as NO in the step S1501, the lamp control unit 150 determines whether or not the control command related to the lamp light emission effect has been received (step S1503). When the control command related to the lamp light emission effect is received (step S1503: YES), the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamp light emission effect (step S1504). The lamp control unit 150 stores a plurality of light emission patterns for causing the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 to emit light. For example, the lamp control unit 150 has a light emission pattern corresponding to the reach light emission effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to the pattern matching effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to the accessory operation effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to the first light emission effect, and a second light emission effect. The light emission pattern corresponding to, the light emission pattern corresponding to the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, the light emission pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous light emission effect, and the like are stored. The control command contains information indicating one of these multiple emission patterns. The lamp control unit 150 reads a light emission pattern stored in advance in response to a received control command, and executes a lamp light emission effect of causing the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 to emit light. After receiving the control command, the lamp control unit 150 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 based on the light emission pattern stored in advance.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various light emitting effects can be performed by using the decorative pattern during the variable effect, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may have the following embodiments.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example in which the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are performed after the SPSP reach effect is performed has been described, but other reach effects (N reach effect, SP reach effect) have been performed. The first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed later. Further, when a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, OP4) is selected, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed, and the fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, OP1) is generated. When selected, at least one of the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may not be performed. Further, even if a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is prepared, an effect (direct hit effect) in which the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode without the reach effect being performed is prepared. good. When the variation pattern for performing the direct hit effect is selected, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed, or at least one of the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed. It does not have to be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, light emission is executed in association with each light emission effect (specifically, a hit light emission effect, a non-reach medium light emission effect, a first reach symbol light emission effect, a reach line effect, and a chance eye light emission effect). It was decided to emit light from the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 in a light emission pattern capable of discriminating the type of effect. In another embodiment, the light emission pattern for each light emission effect is not displayed, and the image (specifically, the effect images 60 to 64, 70, 80, 82, 91, 92) related to each light emission effect is not displayed. Each of the above light emission effects may be realized by emitting light from the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in the image display means (liquid crystal display device 5) for displaying an image, and the image display means performs a light emitting effect on the decorative symbol 55. In another embodiment, the decorative symbol is displayed not only on the image display means but also on another display means (for example, a 7-segment display capable of displaying the numbers "0" to "9"), and the light emitting effect for the decorative symbol is produced. It may be done.

Further, in another embodiment, a main liquid crystal display device corresponding to the liquid crystal screen 5 of the present embodiment and a sub liquid crystal display device (not shown) may be provided (hereinafter, "main liquid crystal" and "sub liquid crystal"). (Abbreviated as). For example, the sub liquid crystal display is an image display device having a smaller display screen than the main liquid crystal display. The sub liquid crystal is, for example, movably configured with respect to the gaming board 2, and is mainly in the width direction (horizontal direction with respect to the player), the height direction (vertical direction with respect to the player), and the diagonal direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The front side of the liquid crystal can be moved and rotated. The sub liquid crystal is arranged at an initial position (for example, on the side of the main liquid crystal) that does not reduce the visibility of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal as much as possible when it is not operating, and a player can visually recognize a part or all of the sub liquid crystal. Placed in possible positions. The front surface and the back surface of the sub liquid crystal display are decorated with a predetermined value, and a light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED capable of emitting light with a predetermined light emitting pattern is built in. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect even when no image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. In such a configuration, for example, the effect images 60 to 64 related to the hit light emission effect, the non-reach medium light emission effect images 70, the images 80 to 82 related to the reach light emission effect, and the effect images 91 and 92 related to the chance eye light emission effect are displayed. It may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. The corresponding decorative symbol 55 may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display or the sub liquid crystal display. It should be noted that each of the above light emission effects may be executed by causing the sub-liquid crystal display to emit light in the light emission pattern for each of the above light emission effects.

Further, the various values exemplified in the above embodiment (for example, fluctuation time, probability, etc.) are merely examples, and values different from those described above may be used.

Further, it goes without saying that the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and the present invention can be realized even with other configurations. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for the determination, etc. in the above-mentioned flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other orders and values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

[Structure of a gaming machine according to the present invention and its action and effect]
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. It should be noted that the parentheses indicate the correspondence with the embodiment and are merely examples.

(Structure 1)
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine according to the configuration 1 displays a decorative symbol (for example, a set of symbols) suggesting that a jackpot game is to be performed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect image 61 is displayed), and after the first light emission effect, a second light emission effect (for example, display of the effect image 62) is performed.

Here, "the first light emitting effect is performed when displaying the decorative symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is performed" means that the first is in a state where the decorative symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is performed is displayed. When performing a light emission effect, when performing the first light emission effect at the timing when a decorative symbol suggesting that a big hit game is performed, or immediately before displaying a decorative symbol suggesting that a big hit game is performed. This includes the case where the first light emission effect is performed.

According to this configuration 1, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect can be performed in a state where the decorative symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is performed is displayed before the decorative symbol is finally stopped, and the jackpot can be performed. Decorative patterns that suggest that the game is played can be emphasized.

(Structure 2)
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine according to the configuration 2 emits light when displaying a decorative symbol (for example, a set of symbols) suggesting that the jackpot game is performed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (first). At least one of the light emission effect and the second light emission effect) is performed. Depending on the game state, there are cases where the light emission effect is performed and cases where the light emission effect is not performed.

For example, in the normal gaming state, both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are executed, while in the probabilistic gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than in the normal gaming state, the first light emitting effect is executed but the second light emitting effect is executed. It is not necessary to perform the light emission effect. Further, in the probabilistic gaming state, the second light emission effect may be executed, but the first light emission effect may not be executed.

According to this configuration 2, when displaying a decorative symbol suggesting that a jackpot game is performed, it is possible to prevent the light emission effect from being executed, for example, in a probabilistic game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emitting effect from being repeatedly performed in a relatively short time, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

(Structure 3)
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine according to the configuration 3 performs the first light emitting effect when displaying a decorative symbol (for example, a set of symbols) suggesting that the jackpot game is performed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the first light emitting effect, the second light emitting effect is performed. The decorative symbol includes a plurality of types of symbols including a first symbol (for example, an odd number symbol) and a second symbol (for example, an even symbol) different from the first symbol. It is suggested that the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are performed when the first symbol (the symbol alignment of the "3" symbols) suggesting that the jackpot game is performed, and the jackpot game is performed. When displaying the second symbol (the symbol alignment of the "4" symbol), the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed.

According to this configuration 3, even when the first symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is performed is displayed or the second symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is performed is displayed, the first light emission is performed. The effect and the second light emission effect can be performed, and the decorative pattern suggesting that the jackpot game is performed can be emphasized.

(Structure 4)
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine according to the configuration 4 performs a light emitting effect when displaying a decorative symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is performed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol has a first symbol (for example, a symbol with a number from "1" to "9") and a second symbol (for example, a number) different from the first symbol. There are multiple types of symbols, including special symbols that have not been created. When displaying the first symbol (symbol matching of numerical symbols) suggesting that the jackpot game is performed, a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, the first light emitting effect and / or the second light emitting effect when the symbols are aligned) is performed. , When displaying a second symbol (special symbol) suggesting that a jackpot game is performed, a light emission effect different from the above-mentioned predetermined light emission effect (for example, a first light emission effect and / or a second light emission effect when the special symbol is stopped). Luminous effect) is performed.

According to this configuration 4, different light emission differs depending on whether the first symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is performed or the second symbol suggesting that the jackpot game is performed is displayed. It is possible to produce, diversify the production, and improve the interest.

(Structure 5)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 5 has a plurality of jackpots including a first jackpot game (4R normal jackpot) and a second jackpot game (10R probability variable jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game. It is possible to play a game. When the first jackpot game is performed, when the decorative symbol suggesting that the first jackpot game is performed is displayed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (in the probabilistic game state, it is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot). When the pattern irregularity is displayed in the case) The first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are not performed. When the second big hit game is performed, the first light emission is performed when a decorative symbol (a set of "7" symbols) suggesting that the second big hit game is performed is displayed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. An effect is performed, and after the first light emission effect, a second light emission effect is performed.

According to this configuration 5, for example, when a disadvantageous jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state is won, a decorative symbol suggesting that the first jackpot game is performed is displayed, and the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are performed. If a favorable jackpot is won without execution, a decorative symbol suggesting that the second jackpot game is performed can be displayed, and the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect can be executed.

(Structure 6)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 6 suggests that a jackpot game may be performed and does not suggest that a jackpot game is to be performed. , Pseudo-continuous symbol, temporary stop of developed symbol, etc.)), it is possible to perform a predetermined light emission effect (for example, pre-reading chance eye light emission effect, pseudo continuous light emission effect, etc.). In the case of a big hit, a specific light emitting effect (first light emitting effect in the hit light emitting effect and / / Or the second light emission effect) is performed.

According to this configuration 6, when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode that does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode that suggests that the jackpot game is performed. If so, a specific light emission effect is performed. As a result, even if the jackpot game is not performed, the player can be expected and the interest can be improved.

(Structure 7)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 7 has a predetermined light emitting effect when displaying a decorative pattern (for example, a chance eye) in a manner suggesting that a jackpot game may be performed and not suggesting that a jackpot game is performed. (For example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead chance eye emission effect). In the case of a big hit, a specific light emitting effect (first light emitting effect in the hit light emitting effect and / / Or the second light emission effect) is performed. The time from the end of the predetermined light emission effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol is different from the time from the end of the specific light emission effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol.

According to this configuration 7, when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode that does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode that suggests that the jackpot game is performed. If so, a specific light emission effect is performed. The period from the end of the predetermined light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol is different from the period from the end of the specific light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol. For example, if the period from the end of the specific light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol is longer than the period from the end of the predetermined light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol, the specific light emitting effect is executed longer. It is possible to make the player feel satisfied that the jackpot game is performed. Further, when the period from the end of the specific light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol is shorter, the specific light emitting effect can be performed in a short time, and the jackpot game can be executed earlier.

(Structure 8)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 8 indicates a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a chance eye) when displaying a decorative pattern (for example, a chance eye) in a manner suggesting that a jackpot game may be performed and not suggesting that a jackpot game is performed. For example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead chance eye emission effect). In the case of a big hit, when a decorative symbol (for example, a set of symbols) suggesting that a big hit game is performed is displayed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a specific light emitting effect (first light emitting effect in the hit light emitting effect) is displayed. And / or the second light emission effect). The execution time of a predetermined light emission effect and the execution time of a specific light emission effect are different.

According to this configuration 8, when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode that does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode that suggests that the jackpot game is performed. If so, a specific light emission effect is performed. The execution time of a predetermined light emission effect and the execution time of a specific light emission effect are different. For example, when the execution time of a specific light emission effect is longer than the execution time of a predetermined light emission effect, the specific light emission effect can be executed longer, and the player is satisfied with the jackpot game being performed. Can be embraced. Further, when the execution time of the specific light emission effect is shorter, the specific light emission effect can be performed in a short time, and the jackpot game can be executed earlier.

(Structure 9)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 9 displays a decorative symbol (for example, a temporary stop) in the first aspect (for example, the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 24 (L)) for notifying that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. ), And the decorative symbol in the second mode (for example, the mode exemplified in FIG. 24 (N)) for notifying that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute the second light emission effect that is executed when the display (for example, temporary stop) is performed.

According to this configuration 9, when notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, the first light emitting effect is executed when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is displayed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second aspect is The second light emission effect is executed when the decorative pattern of is displayed. As a result, since the light emitting effect is executed twice in a state where the mode of the decorative pattern is different, the impression of the light emitting effect can be different, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

(Structure 10)
The first game machine according to the configuration 10 is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) in an aspect (for example, matching of symbols) for notifying that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform a light emission effect and a second light emission effect. The execution time of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are different (for example, the first light emitting effect is executed at a timing prior to the second light emitting effect. Further, the length of time required for the first light emitting effect is It is different from the length of time required for the second light emission effect.).

According to this configuration 10, when notifying that the jackpot game is executed, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are executed at different execution times. This makes it possible to change the impression that each light emission effect gives to the player.

(Structure 11)
The first game machine according to the configuration 11 is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) in an aspect (for example, matching of symbols) for notifying that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a light emission effect and a second light emission effect different from the first light emission effect (for example, the effect image 61 related to the first light emission effect and the effect image 62 related to the second light emission effect are different images). be.

According to this configuration 11, different light emission effects can be executed twice when the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner of notifying that the jackpot game is executed. As a result, the impression given to the player by each light emission effect can be changed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the effect from becoming monotonous when notifying that the jackpot game is executed.

(Structure 12)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 12 has a specific light emitting effect (for example, a hit) that is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, a set of symbols) for notifying that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. Light emission effect) and predetermined light emission effect (for example, reach light emission effect, non-reach medium light emission effect, look-ahead) executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that does not notify that the jackpot game is executed (for example, a loss mode). The chance eye light emission effect and the chance eye light emission effect) can be executed. The number of times these light emission effects are executed is the first number of times in the case of the first variation pattern, and is the second number of times more than the first number of times in the case of the second variation pattern.

According to this configuration 12, it is possible to make the number of executions of the light emission effect different depending on the type of the variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the effect from becoming monotonous by giving a range to the effect.

(Structure 13)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 13 has a specific light emitting effect (for example, a hit) that is executed when a decorative symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, a set of symbols) for notifying that a jackpot game is executed during a variable display of a special symbol. A predetermined light emission effect (for example, reach light emission effect, non-reach) executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode (for example, reach mode or loss mode) that does not notify that the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to execute the light emission effect, the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect). The number of times the light emission effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol differs between the first symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second symbol (for example, the middle symbol).

According to this configuration 13, it is possible to make the number of times the light emission effect is executed different between the first symbol and the second symbol. This makes it possible to effectively prevent the effect during the variable display of the special symbol from becoming monotonous.

(Structure 14)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 14 has a specific light emitting effect (for example, a hit light emitting effect) executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner of notifying that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. A predetermined light emission effect (for example, reach light emission effect, non-reach medium light emission effect, look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission) executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner that does not notify that the jackpot game is executed. (Direction) and can be executed. The light emitting effect can be executed the first number of times in the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), and can be executed the second number of times more than the first number in the second gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state). Is.

According to this configuration 14, it is possible to make the number of times the light emission effect is executed different between the case of the first gaming state and the case of the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to impart a game property that allows the game state to be inferred based on the number of times the light emission effect is executed.

(Structure 15)
As the light emitting effect, the gaming machine according to the configuration 15 executes a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a second reach symbol light emitting effect) executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode during the reach effect, and a jackpot game. It is possible to execute a specific light emitting effect (for example, a hit light emitting effect) that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner of notifying that. In the case of the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), it is possible to execute a predetermined light emitting effect and a specific light emitting effect. Further, in the case of the second gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state), it is possible to execute a specific light emitting effect without executing a predetermined light emitting effect.

According to this configuration 15, in the second gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific light emitting effect without executing a predetermined light emitting effect, and in the first gaming state, both of these light emitting effects can be executed. be. As a result, it is possible to impart a playability that allows the game state to be inferred depending on the presence or absence of the light emission effect during the reach effect.

(Structure 16)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 16 executes, as a light emitting effect, a specific light emitting effect (for example, a hit light emitting effect) executed when displaying a decorative symbol in a manner of notifying that a jackpot game is executed, and a jackpot game. It is possible to execute a predetermined light emission effect (for example, a non-reach medium light emission effect, a look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect) that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that does not notify that the decorative pattern is to be displayed. be. When notifying that the jackpot game is not executed and the reach effect is executed, the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect are not executed (for example, the hit light emission effect and the non-reach are being displayed while the reach loss eye is displayed. Do not perform with light emission effect). When notifying that the jackpot game is not executed and the reach effect is not executed, the above-mentioned predetermined light emission effect can be executed (for example, the non-reach medium light emission effect is executed while the lost eyes other than the reach lost eyes are displayed. Possible). When notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, the above-mentioned specific light emitting effect can be executed (for example, the first light emitting effect can be executed while the symbols are displayed).

According to this configuration 16, it is possible to execute the light emitting effect when the reach effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed and when the notification that the jackpot game is to be executed is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light emitting effect from becoming extremely low. Further, when the jackpot game is not executed and the reach effect is executed, the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from getting bored due to the appearance of the light emitting effect too much.

(Structure 17)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 17 has a first light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect, which are executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner of notifying that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. Is feasible. When the reach effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, and when notifying that the jackpot game is not executed, the first game state (for example, the normal game state) and the second game state (for example, the probability change game state) are in progress. In either of the above, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are not executed (for example, the hit light emitting effect is not executed regardless of the gaming state while the reach loss eye is displayed). When notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, it is possible to execute the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

According to this configuration 17, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are not executed when notifying that the reach effect is executed and the jackpot game is not executed regardless of the game state. Further, regardless of the game state, when notifying that the jackpot game is not executed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed. This makes it possible to give a sense of unity between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

(Structure 18)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 18 can execute a light emission effect (for example, a hit light emission effect and a non-reach light emission effect) that is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. If the reach effect is executed when the jackpot game is not executed, the above-mentioned light emission effect is not executed (for example, the hit light emission effect and the non-reach light emission effect are not executed while the reach loss eye is displayed), and the jackpot game is executed. If the reach effect is not executed, the above light emission effect can be executed (for example, the non-reach medium light emission effect can be executed while the lost eyes other than the reach lost eyes are displayed). The light emitting effect includes a first light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect, which are executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode of notifying that the jackpot game is executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed in the first time (for example, a time longer than the execution time of the non-reach light emission effect) during the control in the first game state (for example, the normal game state). It is possible to produce and perform. During the control in the second gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state), the first time is in the second time (for example, the time different from the execution time of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect during the control in the first gaming state). It is possible to perform a light emission effect and a second light emission effect.

According to this configuration 18, it is possible to execute the light emitting effect when the reach effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed and when the jackpot game is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light emitting effect from becoming extremely low even if the light emitting effect is not executed when the reach effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot game is executed, the light emission effect can be executed in the execution time according to the game state.

(Structure 19)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 19 can execute the light emitting effect executed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. The light emitting effect includes a specific light emitting effect (for example, a hit light emitting effect) that is executed when a decorative symbol is displayed in a mode that notifies that the jackpot game is executed, and a mode that does not notify that the jackpot game is executed. There is a predetermined light emission effect (for example, a non-reach medium light emission effect, a look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect) executed when displaying a decorative symbol in. When notifying that the jackpot game is not executed, when the reach effect is executed, the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect are not executed (for example, the hit light emission effect and the non-reach while the reach loss eye is displayed). If the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined light emission effect can be executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, the non-reach medium light emission effect is specified while the loss eyes other than the reach loss eyes are displayed). Can be executed in the execution time of). When notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, the specific light emitting effect can be executed at an execution time different from the predetermined execution time (for example, the hit light emitting effect is set to the predetermined execution time while the symbols are displayed. Can be executed at different execution times).

According to this configuration 19, it is possible to execute the light emitting effect when the reach effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed and when the jackpot game is executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light emitting effect from becoming extremely low even if the light emitting effect is not executed when the reach effect is executed. Further, it is possible to prevent the light emitting effect from becoming monotonous by making the execution time of the specific light emitting effect different from that of the predetermined light emitting effect.

(Structure 20)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 20 has a predetermined effect during the variable display of the special symbol (for example, a reach effect in which the chance up is executed) and a stop display of the decorative symbol when notifying that the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect (for example, a hit light emitting effect) to be executed. During the predetermined effect, the light emitting means (for example, the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37) is made to emit light in the first light emitting pattern, and during the light emitting effect, the light emitting means is made to emit light in the second light emitting pattern.

According to this configuration 20, it is possible to make the light emission pattern different between the predetermined effect and the light emission effect. This makes it possible to give a range to the production mode.

(Structure 21)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 21 can execute the light emitting effect executed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. The light emitting effect includes a specific light emitting effect (for example, a hit light emitting effect) executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode notifying that the jackpot game is executed, and a decorative symbol displayed in the reach mode during the reach effect. There is a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a second reach symbol light emitting effect) to be executed when the operation is performed. During a specific light emitting effect, the light emitting means (for example, a panel lamp 25 and / or a frame lamp 37) is made to emit light with a first light emitting pattern, and during a predetermined light emitting effect, the light emitting means is emitted with a second light emitting pattern corresponding to the reach effect. Let me.

According to this configuration 21, a specific light emitting effect and a predetermined light emitting effect can be executed as the light emitting effect. This makes it possible to increase the number of modes of light emission effect. Further, since the light emitting means can emit light in the second light emitting pattern corresponding to the reach effect during the predetermined light emission effect, the reach effect can be emphasized more than the predetermined light emission effect.

(Structure 22)
When the gaming machine according to the configuration 22 displays the decorative pattern in a manner that suggests that the jackpot game may be performed and does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed, a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, chance eye light emission). It is possible to perform (effect) and make a predetermined light emitting means (for example, a board lamp 25 and / or a frame lamp 37) emit light with a light emitting pattern corresponding to the predetermined light emitting effect (lamp light emitting effect corresponding to a chance eye). be. In the case of a jackpot, when displaying a decorative symbol (symbol matching) that suggests that a jackpot game will be performed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a specific light emission effect (first light emission effect in the hit light emission effect and (Or a second light emission effect) can be performed and the light emission means can be made to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the specific light emission effect (lamp light emission effect corresponding to the hit light emission effect).

According to this configuration 22, in addition to the above configuration 6, a predetermined light emitting effect and a specific light emitting effect are performed, and the light emitting means is made to emit light. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the above configuration 6, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in conjunction with each of a predetermined light emitting effect and a specific light emitting effect, and the interest can be further enhanced.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 LCD display device 7 Movable accessory 11 1st start port 12 2nd start port 13 Grand prize opening 24 Speaker 25 Board lamp 26 Direction button 37 Frame lamp 41 1st special symbol display 42 2nd special symbol display Instrument 51 Hold icon 52 Hold number 53 Fluctuating icon 55 Decorative symbol 56 Small symbol 57 4th symbol corresponding to the 1st special symbol 59 4th symbol corresponding to the 2nd special symbol 60-64 Effect image 70 Non-reach medium emission effect Image 80 Effect image 81 Reach line image 82 Effect image 91,92 Effect image 101,131,141,151 CPU
130 Production control unit 140 Image sound control unit 150 Lamp control unit 65 Operation promotion image 651 Validity period image

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a main control means and an effect control means,
The main control means
Judgment means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition,
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the identification information control means for displaying the identification information in a variable manner in any one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the first fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern, and then stopping and displaying the identification information.
A control information transmission means for transmitting predetermined control information is provided.
The effect control means is
It is possible to receive the control information transmitted from the control information transmitting means, and it is possible to receive the control information.
It is possible to execute a game effect in response to the reception.
For the game production,
A decorative symbol effect in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the determination result of the determination means in accordance with the stop display of the identification information. When,
There is a light emission effect that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed during the variable display.
When the specific control information is received, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
For the light emission effect,
A specific light emitting effect executed when displaying the decorative symbol of the combination for notifying that the special game is executed, and
There is a predetermined light emitting effect that is executed when the decorative symbol of the combination that does not notify that the special game is executed is displayed.
The number of times the light emission effect is executed is
In the case of the first fluctuation pattern, it is the first number of times.
In the case of the second fluctuation pattern, it is the second number of times that is larger than the first number of times.
In the specific light emitting effect, the first image can be superimposed and displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbols.
In the predetermined light emitting effect, the second image can be superimposed and displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbols .
When the specific control information is received in the specific variation display in which the specific light emitting effect is executed, the time from the execution of the specific light emitting effect to the stop display of the decorative symbol is the first time. ,
When the specific control information related to the next variation display is received without receiving the specific control information in the specific variation display, the decorative symbol is displayed after the specific light emitting effect is executed. The time until the stop display is the second time, which is longer than the first time , the gaming machine.

Images